Home

TECOMAT FOXTROT PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS

1. P dii u U Rz R F Fz oe o o Fig 2 12 Typical example of load connection to binary relay outputs of CP 1004 CP 1014 basic modules 2 3 3 Analog inputs Analog inputs are used for connection of analog signals of the controlled object to the PLC Basic CP 1004 and CP 1014 modules contain 4 analog inputs AIO AI3 which are physically identical with DI4 DI7 binary inputs Inputs have no galvanic isolation from the PLC internal circuits All inputs have a joint minus connector DIO DI3 inputs can be used as inputs for counters and inputs DI4 DI7 can be used as analog inputs AIO AI3 If the individual input from the group DI4 DI7 AIO AI3 is not used for analog measuring then it works as a binary input Table 2 26 Basic parameters of analog inputs Number of inputs Number of inputs in group 4 joint inputs with DIO DI3 Galvanic isolation of inside circuits No Diagnostics Overload signalization within status word Joint conductor Minus External power supply No Type of converter sigma delta Time of conversion 350 us Digit differentiating ability 10 bits Input resistance approx 6 kQ Measuring range resolution 1 LSB 0 to 10 V 11 36 mV Allowed continual overload max 10 5 V min 0 V Analog input error lt 3 Maximum error at 25 3 96 of full range Temperature coefficient 0 1 of full range K Linearity
2. A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 AT AB A9 B1 B2 AR RSARABBEBAER 6eeeee 88 ajg BIE CH1 RS 232 ay ee s ONE 2 8 cc e es ST Geib T ese adtjatjactjactjatjiac DIGITAL ANALOG INPUTS RTS in o BUS ANALOG OUTPUTS Fig 2 25 Typical example of the switchers connection to binary inputs of basic modules CP 1005 CP 1015 Attention It is necessary to bear in mind that terminals GND in arrays 24 V DC and ANALOG OUTPUTS are galvanically connected within inside of the system It is not desirable to interconnect the terminal GND in the array ANALOG OUTPUTS to the negative terminal of the source of the supplying system and inputs because there would occur the closing of the loop via the second terminal GND and thus a possible induction of interfering signals could appear 2 4 2 Relay outputs Relay outputs serve to control two state action and signaling elements of the controlled object supplied by alternating or direct current of up to 250V The outputs are realized by a closing voltage free contact relay brought out in a group with one joint terminal Basic modules CP 1005 CP 1015 contain 6 relay outputs DOO DO5 organized in two groups with three outputs each with the joint terminal Outputs are galvanically isolated both from internal PLC circuits and also both groups between themselves The excitation switching of the output is signalized by the
3. 188 0000 90009 0000 nominal range 48 0000 0002 0002 1500 ae range descended range descended 0003 1800 60 5 range underflowing 78 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Tab 2 48 Transferred values of analog inputs for NTC thermistors Measured Variable value STAT FS ENG PCT 1 25 28 0004 900 1 28 1 9 0004 L 105 lrange range exceeding 117 5 E 0000 rom E 7 5 0000 nominal range ae 5 0000 5 EUN Z EUN 1 d range descended range descended 0003 E srangeuncenoning 10500 1000 Q 500 Q Binary value 0 Q o 2 S S M e 2 amp c5 z D PCT Fig 2 38 Range of analog inputs of modules CP 1005 CP 1015 for resistor transmitters OV1000 Table 2 49 Transferred values of analog inouts for OV1000 Measured Variable value STAT FS ENG PCT 1050 Q ee 31 SUC le L 05 range range exceeding 1000 Q 0000 30000 em 0000 nominal range 00 0000 Analog outputs Modules CP 1005 CP 1015 contain 2 analog outputs AOO and AO1 which are in the range of 0 up to 10V Each input has three variables FS ENG and PCT Among these variables we choose one according to which interpretation of the output value is required The configuration of analog outputs can be found in the folder Analog outputs fig 2 39 79 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC
4. 10 5 V eo Fig 3 4 23 Analog outputs range of the IT 1602 module Binary value FSO PCTO Table 3 4 33 Transferred values of analog outputs for the range 0 to 10 V Output value Variable ENG PCT 31500 TERTIUS nominal range 105 V 31500 155 TXV 004 10 02 3 Periferni moduly PLC FOXTROT specialni moduly 3 5 SPECIAL MODULES All other modules which are connected to the basic module via the TCL2 bus belong to this group 3 5 1 CIB MI2 02 external master bus The MI2 02 module contains 2 lines of the CIB bus onto which units of system can be connected Characteristics of both lines are identical to the integrated line of the basic module CP 10xx 3 5 2 D 14 operator panel The ID 14 operator panel contains the display of 4 x 20 characters and 25 buttons The display supports Windows CP1250 WinLatin2 central European CP1251 WinCyrillic Cyrillic alphabet and CP1252 WinLatin1 western European fonts The ID 14 panel is connected to the basic module PLC FOXTROT via the bus TCL2 so in the same manner as common peripheral modules Up to four panels of this type can be connected to one basic module In the set mode we select the type CPU Foxtrot and then we must set the panel address position address in the range of 8 to 11 in the case of more panels on one bus each panel must understandably have a different address The item rack addre
5. 0 0 0 PS 0 0 EV d 6 S 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 PSB 0 0 0 EVB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 EV 1 entering edge tag on input UP PS 1 achieved preset tag counter A EVB 1 entering edge tag on input UPB PSB 1 achieved preset tag counter B CCNT counter control word 0 0 0 0 FC SET RES EN on 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 FCB SETB RESB ENB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 EN O counter A stopped 1 counter A counts RES 1 counter A reset and its clearing SET 1 setting counter A to the SET variable value FC 0 counter A free run 1 clearing counter A when SET variable value is gained ENB 0 B counter stopped 1 B counter counts RESB 1 counter B reset and its clearing SETB 1 setting counter B to the SET variable value FCB O counter B free run 1 clearing counter B when SET variable value is gained Two way counter The counter object contains one two way counter of external events VALA variable equipped with UP DIO or DI2 DOWN DI1 or DI3 counter inputs and a preset SET variable If the entering edge appears on the UP input the counter increases its content by 1 and in the status word in the EV bit the log 1 during one PLC cycle will show as an entering edge tag on the input If the entering edge appears on the DOWN input the counter decreases its content by 1 and in the status word in the EG bit the log 1 during one PLC cycle will show as an entering edge tag on the input If the resultant content of the c
6. 0 mA nm 09 50 15000 100 30000 105 31500 PCT Fig 2 36 Current range from 4 up to 20 mA of analog inputs of modules CP 1005 CP 1015 Table 2 45 Transferred values of analog inputs for 4 up to 20 mA range Measured Variable value STAT FS ENG PCT 000C 31500 20 8 mA E ciao 208 8 198 108 range range exceeding 20 mA 0000 30000 20099 nominal range 0000 0002 0002 1500 M range descended range descended 0003 77 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT CP 101x module display Ol 1073 Pt100 NTC Analog Prtooo 1000 thermistor input 400 4200 4125 378 4188 4117 50 155 70 442 50 68 48 32 50 90 60 40 0 n 0D 5 1500 0 PCT 94 50 15000 100 30000 105 31500 Fig 2 37 Range of analog inputs of modules CP 1005 CP 1015 for resistor sensors Pt100 Pt1000 Ni1000 and NTC thermistors Table 2 46 Transferred values of analog inputs for Pt100 and Pt1000 Measured Variable value STAT FS ENG PCT s E 31500 ur Rom ERO E overflowing ES ee 596 gooo 20 31500 200 a 106 range range exceeding 378 0000 30000 0000 nominal range im 0000 ETIE EE m mar misso aa Table 2 47 Transferred values of analog inputs for Ni1000 Measured Variable value STAT FS ENG PCT 000C 31500 200 0004 31500 108 ee 0004 a 108 range range exceeding
7. DIGITAL ANALOG INPUTS Fig 2 28 Typical example of signals connection to analog inputs of basic modules CP 1005 CP 1015 individual signal types are connectable to any analog input 66 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Table 2 35 Basic parameters of input current ranges gt 50 kQ Analog input error max error at 25 0 3 of full range temperature coefficient 0 02 of full range K non linearity 0 08 of full range repeatability at steady state conditions 0 05 of full range Max allowed permanent overload without 35 V each terminal Al against damage AGND Total time of system input shift type 80 us Repetition period of the sample type 480 us Overload signalization in the status word Open input detection none The jumper of the correspondent input must not be set for current measuring In the measuring mode the input can endure the permanent overload of only 5 V without a damage Table 2 36 Basic parameters of current input ranges 100 Q Analog input error max error at 25 C 0 4 96 of full range temperature coefficient 0 03 of full range K non linearity 0 07 of full range repeatability at steady state conditions 0 05 of full range Max allowed permanent overload without 50 mA each terminal Al against damage AGND Total time of system input shift type 80 us Repetition period of the sample type 480 us Overload signalization in the status word Open inp
8. range range exceeding 0000 20000 0000 nominal range OV 0000 Table 2 41 Transferred values of analog inputs for O up to 2 V range Measured Variable value STAT FS ENG PCT 000C 31500 Rudi overflowing 2 1 V 0004 31500 perque m ES 0004 BEI L 108 range range exceeding 0000 oo 0000 nominal range 0000 75 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT CP 101x module display Ol 1073 Table 2 42 Transferred values of analog inputs for O up to 1 V range Measured Variable value STAT FS ENG PCT 000C EE 0000 30000 gee OV 0000 Table 2 43 Transferred values of analog inputs for O up to 0 5 V range Measured Variable value STAT FS ENG PCT gt 0 525 V Ho 31500 PRSE NE overflowing EL 525 V Haee e a 500 a 525 198 108 range range exceeding 0000 30000 0000 nominal range 0000 21 mA 20 mA 10 mA Binary value 0 mA o 2 S 3 t e 2 DD S PCT Fig 2 35 Current range from 0 up to 20 mA of analog inputs of modules CP 1005 CP 1015 Table 2 44 Transferred values of analog inputs for O up to 20 mA range Measured Variable value STAT FS ENG PCT Lim Xo 5809 11 5 a 21 m 0004 9 LH 0004 L 108 range range exceeding 20 EUM 0000 i 0000 nominal range 0000 76 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Analog input
9. By pressing any key the firmware upgrade will be terminated The central unit will reset and run again under the new firmware version that is displayed during the switching sequence on the central unit indication 7 1 2 Other processors firmware change Changes of firmware of peripheral modules and peripheral parts of the basic unit are executed via the central unit connected through the Ethernet interface using the Flasher program All other communications with the central unit must be terminated before the activation of the Flasher program esp communication with Mosaic If we did not do so the Flasher would notify that it is not possible to establish the connection with the central unit Communications can be terminated for example by disconnection of all other communication cables from the central unit After execution of the flasher exe program the following window will appear 217 TXV 004 10 02 7 PLC maintenance Flasher ver 1 0 1 11 x Communication parameters CPM r Module parameters IP address 192 168 134 148 Rack ji z Use port 61682 Position k z t1601 tfw FLASH Fig 7 1 Flasher program window In the Communication parameters CPM section we set the IP address of the PLC The port number must always be 61682 do not tick the item Use port In the Module parameters section we set the group number item Rack and module address item Position Within TECOMAT FOXTROT sys
10. Changes to PLC network 5 5 PROGRAMMING AND DEBUGGING OF THE PLC PROGRAM PLC programming Programming of control algorithms and testing of the program correctness for the FOXTROT PLOs is carried out on computers of a PC standard For connection with the PLC a common serial channel of these computers or the Ethernet interface is used For each PLC a CD ROM with the installation of the MOSAIC development environment in the version Mosaic Lite is supplied 180 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Mosaic development environment The Mosaic development environment is a complex development tool for programming of PLC TECOMAT applications and TECOREG controllers that provides a user friendly application for a program creation and debugging It is a product running under the Windows 2000 XP platform where a large number of modern technologies are employed The following versions are available Mosaic Lite non key version with a possibility to program a PLC with three declarations modules Mosaic Compact enables programming of compact TECOMAT PLC controllers of the range TC400 TC500 TC600 TC650 FOXTROT and TECOREG regulators without limitations Mosaic Profi designated for all systems of Teco company without limitations The environment contains a text editor xPRO mnemocode translator debugger PLC communication module PLC configuration module and a system help Further it contains tools for designing of operat
11. Input data DI DIP CNT IN1 CNT IN1 CNT IN1 CNT_IN1 CNT_IN2 CNT_IN2 binary input values 8times boolean type D Die Dib Di4 DI3 D2 Di DIO 6 0 bit 7 ES 4 3 2 1 DIO DI3 binary inputs useable for counters DI4 DI7 binary inputs useable for analog measurements If an individual input is used for analog measuring then the corresponding DI bit has permanently the value of 0 binary input values with short impulse detection 8times boolean type o 0 o o DIP3 DIP2 DIPf DIPO bit 7 6 5 4 3 e 1 0 DIPO DIP3 input values DIO DI3 with artificial prolongation of selected level during one cycle detection of short impulses counter input object 1 TCNTF IN structure SONT counter status word 1 16times boolean type L0 o O EPS EMD EN EG EV bit 6 29 4 3 2 1 0 Oe SG 25 L9 TEEPSBTE SB 71 79 3 59 O EVB T bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 EV 1 active edge tag on DIO EG 1 active edge tag on DI1 ENI 1 active edge tag on DI2 EMD 1 active edge tag on DI3 EPS 1 achieved preset tag EVB 1 active edge tag on DI1 B counter EPSB 1 achieved preset tag B counter according to the mode according to the mode according to the mode according to the mode p atin VALA first input value interpretation according to the counter mode udint type counter value 1 counter and IRC period during which t
12. identification of the cable length table 4 9 Table 4 9 Order numbers of cables according to the length Leng ath m KB 0205 KB 0206 TXN 102 05 02 TXN 102 06 02 TXN 102 05 04 TXN 102 06 04 TXN 102 05 08 TXN 102 06 08 TXN 102 05 20 TXN 102 06 20 Note Different lengths can be agreed with the business department Detailed information on realization of communication connections and networks can be found in the Manual for designing of programmable logic controllers TECOMAT FOXTROT TXV 004 11 02 165 TXV 004 10 02 5 PLC operation 5 PLC OPERATION 5 1 INSTRUCTIONS FOR SAFE OPERATION With PLC supply on and with power supply of input and output PLC circuits on it is not permitted to disconnect or connect either power supply conductors or signal or bus conductors connected to PLC modules terminals When programming PLC control algorithms the possibility of an error in the user program cannot be eliminated which could result in an unexpected behaviour of the object being controlled the consequence of which could be an emergency situation or in the worst case could be hazardous to persons When operating the PLC especially during trial runs and while debugging of new user programs with the controlled object it is unconditionally necessary to pay a high attention to this The object being controlled must be adjusted so that zero values of the control signals PLC without power supply ensure a stable and collision free
13. 30000 The transferred value in the ENG variable is a real type variable and represents directly the value of output voltage in volts The transferred value in the PCT variable is a real type variable and represents the percentage relation between nominal and measured value of the analog input The PCT variable is related to the FS variable It applies that for the value FS 0 is the PCT 0 and for the value FS 30000 the PCT 100 The PCT variable can reach a maximum value of 105 which corresponds to FS 31500 Outputs behaviour in the HALT mode can be defined by two alternatives If we mark the item Freeze then after the transmission to the HALT mode the analog output stays set to the last value entered by the user program If we mark the item Defined state then after the transmission to the HALT mode the value set in the relevant field will be set to analog output This set value has the format identical to the selected transmitted variable This means that if we use the FS format the value is of an int type within the range 0 31500 if we use the ENG format the value is of a real type within the range 0 10 5 V and if we use the PCT format the value is of a real type within the range 0 105 After the supply switch on analog outputs are always set to the value of 0 Analog output eoo OV o Ss 2 210 FSO oo e eo LO Fig 3 4 13 Analog outputs range of the IT 1601 module Table 3 4 20 Trans
14. Binary 10 w Enable binary outputs carry from DOO to DO v Enable binary outputss carry from DOS to D011 Enable ignore module error Fig 3 2 5 Configuration of binary outputs If we check an item Enable ignoring module error at the bottom side of OS 1401 Module settings pane CPU doesn t stop user program performing even when the fatal error of data exchange with this module occurs but it tries to reinitialize the module and renew the communication The actual module status and the validity of data can be found in peripheral system status zone chap 6 5 This function can be used in case we want to keep PLC running even if peripheral module power supply is switched off 109 TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules IR 1501 module 3 3 COMBINED MODULES OF BINARY INPUTS AND OUTPUTS These modules contain binary inputs and outputs and are connected to the basic module via the TCL2 bus 3 3 4 IR 1501 module The IR 1501 peripheral module contains 4 binary 24 V DC inputs and 8 relay outputs Inputs can be used as standard binary inputs or inputs for counters All inputs and outputs have galvanic isolation The module is powered by 24 V DC which has no galvanic isolation from the internal circuits R 1501 ere Pad OODOODOOUOO Fig 3 3 1 IH 1501 auxiliary module Table 3 3 1 Basic parameters of the IR 1501 module Power supply voltage SELV 24 VDC 2595 1596 Internal protection none Maximum input
15. Data exchange via system bus errors The reason is a high level of disturbance missing or non functional termination of the bus or a PLC fault Another reason can be an older version of the software of the central unit or of the corresponding module Incorrect software of peripheral module The peripheral module does not support the required function The firmware version of this module must be changed low power voltage of peripheral module The power voltage of the peripheral module dropped beneath an acceptable limit thus limiting the correct functioning of the module Other errors reported by the peripheral module are described in the documentation for such module 204 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers 6 3 4 System errors FF kk kkkk central unit system error kk any number specifying the error type Central unit malfunction please contact the manufacturer 6 4 OTHER ERRORS If another error occurs that does not influence the control itself significantly the diagnostic system only identifies the error and process control is still in progress Information on the error is disclosed in the register S34 the first byte that can then be used for user handling of these errors and in registers S48 S51 full code The error can also be found by reading of the error stack by the superior system PC 6 4 4 System errors According to requirements these errors can be treated via the user program using registers
16. In the folder External I O modules we click on the K icon on the relevant line 131 TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules IT 1602 module Project manager PLC Address 0 Connection type Not connecte Common settings 2 Autogenerate config file C Configuration can t be changed Suppre Hw Select type of PLC series Foxtrot CPU Estem 1 0 modules Extern CIB Displays Hw Configuration des Moue pe Name verson Order number 0 PLC Network logical conr Sw Environment Documentation 18 1301 TXN 113 01 IR 1501 TXN 115 01 05 1401 TXN 114 01 IT 1601 TXN 116 01 se J Ic SA Accessories Fig 3 4 5 Peripheral modules configuration Analog inputs The IT 1601 module contains 8 analog inputs AIO to AI7 which have various measuring ranges Each input has four variables STAT FS ENG and PCT State STAT is always transferred among variables FS ENG and PCT we choose one depending on the interpretation of the measured value required The configuration of analog inputs can be found in the folder Analog inputs fig 3 4 6 The transferred value in the FS variable is an int type variable The value 0 corresponds to the minimum value of the input unipolar value and the value 31 500 corresponds to the maximum value It applies that 100 of the nominal range of the analog input corresponds to the value of FS 30000 The transferred value in the ENG var
17. TXN 101 04 MR 0114 interface RS 485 with galvanic isolation TXN 101 14 MR 0124 interface RS 422 with galvanic isolation TXN 101 24 PC PLC MPC UNI MDB PFB MR 0152 slave station PROFIBUS DP TXN 101 52 MR 0161 sequencer CAN SJA1000 TXN 101 61 PX 7811 7 binary inputs 24 V TXN 178 11 3 binary inputs 24 V Optional submodules are fitted into the basic module CP 10xx on the middle board at the position described in fig 2 2 Fig 2 2 The location of the exchangeable submodule of the serial interface on the middle board of the basic module If it is necessary to fit or change the submodule retaining pawls of the bottom part of the case must be loosened using the screw After the bottom part of the case is removed we separate the board assembly from the rest part of the case After the removal of the upper part of the board with the indication and connector for the Ethernet interface the exchangeable submodule is accessible 20 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers ATTENTION Modules contain components sensitive to electrostatic charge therefore user guides for these circuits must be abided The manipulation is undertaken on the module that is disconnected from the power supply only While changing submodules it is vital to check carefully the right mounting of submodule female connectors against male connectors on the main board Female connectors have not the location codi
18. The last issue is available at www tecomat com
19. undertake a new compilation and load the corrected user program into the PLC again maximum variable size exceeded The maximum size of the variable of the field type was exceeded in terms of the data exchange with the peripheral module It is necessary to verify the correctness of configuration setup of the particular serial channel undertake a new compilation and load the corrected user program into the PLC again invalid address higher than the maximum possible The module operation is set outside the possible addressable area in the hardware configuration Set the configuration in compliance with the reality either manually or by loading data from the PLC unfinished initialization Initialization of the peripheral module in progress was not finished invalid software of peripheral module The peripheral module does not support required function The firmware version of this module must be changed non existing module In the hw configuration the module operation that does not exists in the real set is set Set the configuration in compliance with the reality either manually or by loading data from the PLC module type in disagreement initialization is intended for another type In the hw configuration an operation of a different module is set than in the real set is fitted on this position Set the configuration in compliance with the reality either manually or by loading data from the PLC module does not support this
20. 00 input DIO 01 input DI 10 input DI2 11 input DI3 59 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT CP 101x module display Ol 1073 2 4 PERIPHERAL PART OF MODULES CP 1005 CP 1015 The peripheral part of modules CP 1005 CP 1015 constitutes of the IR 1056 board containing 6 multipurpose inputs 6 relay outputs and 2 analog outputs Inputs can be used as binary inputs DIO DI5 or as analog inputs AIO Al5 Under the name IR 1056 the processor operating these inputs and outputs appears on the system bus B8 B9 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 amp e888 8 amp amp 8 ee 8 8 amp 8 amp amp CH1 RS 232 RUN ERROR DIGITAL OUTPUTS CONC ORC ORC ORC ORC OC ORC ORC CONC ORC ORC ORC ORC NC ORC ORC C1 C2 c3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 D1 D2 D3 D4 DS D6 D7 D8 D9 Fig 2 24 Basic module CP 1005 In the table 2 30 it is described the connection of terminals in terminal boards B and D The integration of a terminal board A is common for all basic modules and is shown in the table 2 3 in the introduction of the chapter 2 The integration of a terminal board C is dependant on the submodule fitted and its options are described in the chapter 2 2 2 60 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Table 2 30 The integration of terminal boards B and D of modules CP 1005 CP 1015 DI5 AI5 binary input DI5 analog input AI5 COM 1
21. 105 31500 Fig 3 4 21 Analog inputs range of the IT 1602 module for thermocouples Tab 3 4 29 Transferred values of analog inputs for a thermocouple J Measured Variable value STAT FS ENG PCT 000C 31500 1200 mom 31500 8 108 range range exceeding Lm IEEL 146 C 0000 ium 0002 250 0002 1500 BR range descended range descended 0003 1500 280 5 range underflowing Table 3 4 30 Transferred values of analog inputs for a thermocouple K Measured Variable value STAT FS ENG PCT EINE E 1372 000C 31500 1372 Ex ERN overflowing 3x dE ELE ae ee 31590 c 182 18 06 range range exceeding 1301 S 30000 nominal range 1 pus 0000 1 EUM 200 EUM a a g range descended range descended 0003 a T NUNUNGE GER 777 TIT NN 152 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Table 3 4 31 Transferred values of analog inputs for thermocouples R and S Measured Variable value STAT FS ENG PCT 1 768 e 0004 m 500 1 88 1 se 0004 195 range range exceeding 1688 Bu cooo em nominal range 0000 pim 0000 ET ETE ee m mer mr desc Table 3 4 32 Transferred values of analog inputs for a thermocouple B Measured Variable value STAT FS ENG PCT 000C 31500 E eem m overflowing 1820 0004 31500 1820 18 DERE 0004 s ra 1
22. DI3 BOOL dl r0 p3 DI DI3 2010 3 DI4 BDOL dy 0 p3 DI DI4 20004 DI5 B00L d 0 p3 DI DI5 3 105 DIG BOOL d 0_p3_DI DIE 210 6 DIZ BOOL dy r0 p3 DI DI7 2410 7 EDIP TBIN 4DIP Bl i p3 DIP 201 71 ECNT IN1 TCNTF IN i0 p3 ENT IN1 SCNT UINT d i0 p3 ENT IN1 SCNT 30412 VALA UDINT d 10 p3 CNT IN1 VALA XXL14 VALB UDINT dg 0 p3 CNT IN1 VALB 304118 amp CNT IN2 TCNTF IN d 0 p3 CNT IN2 20422 110 AIO TAI i0 p3 AIO ESTAT TAlStat 10_p3_Al0 STAT UNF BOOL dk 0 p3 AIO STAT UNF UNR BODL d 10 p3 AID STAT UNR OVR BDDL dk 10_p3_Al0 STAT OVR OVF BOOL d 0 p3 AID STAT OVF FLS BDOL dk 0 p3 AIO STAT FLS CJC BODL dk 0 p3 AIO STAT CJC CHC BDOL d 0 p3 AID STAT CHC FS INT S 0 p3 Al FS 200 24 ENG REAL al 0 p3 AID ENG NF 36 PCT REAL a p3 AIO PCT Z F40 HAI TAI dy i0 p3 Al 20444 112 amp AI2 TAI d 0 p3 AI2 30455 12 amp AI3 T I d 0 p3 A3 1048 12 EDO TBIN EDO i0 p3 DO DOO BOOL 8 i0 p3 D07DO0 xY20 DO1 BODL E i0 p3 DO DO1 2Y21 D02 BDOL E i0 p3 D07D02 422 DO3 BOOL E i0 p3 DO D03 223 DO4 BODL i0 p3 D07DO4 424 D05 BDOL m i0 p3 D07DO05 V2 5 EICNT_OUT1 TCNTF_OUT 10 p3 CNT DUTI CCNT UINT E iQ p3 CNT DUT1 CENT SET UDINT E i0 p3 CNT DUT1 SET mCNT_OUT2 TCNTF_OUT 9 i0 p3 CNT DUT2 Fig 2 16 IR 1055 respectively IR 1057 boards data structure 41 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT basic modules CP 10x4 module IR 1055 IR 1057 peripheries
23. E Control __CH2 TCHControl 10_p0_Control_CH2 After compil CONTROL UINT m pO Control CH2 CONTROL After compil e g gt CH1 PC CH2 UPD Jf OK X Cancel Help Fig 2 8 Data structure of the PX 7811submodule PX7811 IN outputs binary values 8times boolean type IN7 INO O IN4 INS IN2 INT INO 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 INO IN7 binary inputs input IN5 is not in the PLC FOXTROT physically interconnected bit Status and control structures of the channel Statistic_CH2 and Control_CH2 are not used in this mode 29 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT basic modules lt gt 1 0 setting mPX7812 IN TPX7812_IN LyPueuc eI IN in i tei INO BOOL 2g 10_p0_PX7812_IN INO After namo IN1 BDOL p 10_p0_PX7812_IN IN1 After compil IN2 BDOL Pa 1 p PX7812 IN IN2 After compil IN3 BOOL P4 r p PX7812 IN IN3 After compil PX7812 OUT TFX7812 DUT PUBLIC 1r p PX7812 OUT After compil OUTO BOOL Pu 1 p PX7812 OLIT DLITO After compil OUT1 BOOL p r0_p0_Px7812_0UT 0UTI After compil OUT2 BOOL P4 r p Fx7812 OUT OUT2 After compil OUT3 BOOL gp 10_p0_PX7812_ OUT OUT3 After compil E Statistic_CH2 TCHStatistic 10_p0_Statistic_CH2 After compil STAT USINT i 1r pO Statistic CH27STAT After compil ERR USINT l 10_p0_Statistic_CH2 ERR After compil trueMes UDINT l 10_pO0_Statistic_CH2 trueMes After compil falseMes UDINT l 10_p0_Statistic_C
24. besides the relevant project also projects from all other PLCs from the project group which are in any way connected to this PLC will be saved too in the project manager in the folder Hw PLC network logic interconnection Input a password into the field Password and input the same password into Password check If we want to see what we are writing we can switch off the character masking by pressing the button By pressing it again the masking will be renewed The maximum password length is 20 characters Then press the button Create and save the backup to the PLC and Mosaic will create an archive and save it to the central unit If another project has been already saved into the central unit then a window will appear stating its name and time of archivation and will ask you to confirm the overwriting of the former project Project restoration In the Mosaic environment choose from the menu File Archiving Restore the project from the PLC and the panel Project group restoration from the PLC Fig 5 7 will appear The description of the saved project that we entered during its archivation will appear in the right field Input the password into the field Password If you want to see what you are writing you can switch off the character masking by pressing the button By pressing it again the masking will be renewed After pressing the button Download from the PLC the PLC archive is downloaded to the computer In the part New pro
25. counter 2B stopped 1 counter 2B counts RESB 1 counter 2B reset and clearing SETB 1 counter 2B set to the SET value FCB 0 counter 2B runs free 1 clear counter 2B after the SET value is gained CNT_OUT2 SET counter 2 preset The behaviour of individual data objects is described in the chapter below 3 3 1 5 Initialization and behaviour of individual data objects of the IR 1501 module The IR 1501 peripheral module contains a block of binary inputs and outputs and two counter objects The panel for module parameters settings can be opened from the project manager HW HW configuration Fig 3 3 7 In the folder External I O modules click on the H icon on the relevant line Project manager PLC Address 0 Connection type Not connecte Common settings utogenerate contig file Configuration can t be changed Suppre Hw Configuration f HEEE PLC Network logical conr Select type of PLC series Foxtrot je CPU Estem 1 0 modules Estem CIB Displays Envtonmen dies eee Nae veson Orern Documentation 1B TXN 11301 l TXN 11501 TXN 114 01 TXN 116 01 SA Accessories Fig 3 3 7 Configuration of peripheral modules 120 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Binary inputs The binary input state is contained in the DI variable The state of all four inputs is valid even in cases when inputs are used for alternative functions short impulses capturing
26. program start or the last pressing of any button The backlit can be activated for the next 60 minutes by pressing any button or by PLC transfer to another mode HALT RUN The backlit is switched on the light when PLC system error occurs too 81 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT CP 101x module display Ol 1073 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 AT A8 A9 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 3 4 NN ee M 3 4 NM MEME l a a XE a a N a 2 N Oo stQ tOs Q amp rc sese esa ee iz 2 8 8 8 B 82 8z 82 52 TC LINE 24 V CI BUS CH1 RS 232 DIGITAL SPECIAL INPUTS DIGITAL ANALOG INPUTS o mecemer Y Fox rot CP 1014 RUN ERROR ETHERNET MODE 4 gt Cc _ CH2 OPTIONAL SUEDE eg RS 232 REA DIGITAL S gt gt alo 05 2 Ere ae Q pa N z eo x p eoleg lza aloe 2 SIS e ears ies ee eis e e e 8 e ee C1 C2 3 C4 C5 C6 Cr C8 c9 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Fig 2 41 Basic module CP 1014 2 5 1 Display fonts The display is used both for displaying of system information and for application use by the user as an operational panel If the display is operated by the user program then in the RUN mode it works in the user mode l e it displays characters generated by the user program Via the MODE button it is possible to switch to the system mode for the purpose of displaying the system state The behaviour of the display in the system mode
27. which corresponds to FS 31500 48 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Analog input Binary value OV eo 2 Sie z 22 FS ale o co e Fig 2 22 Current range of analog inputs of the modules CP 1004 CP 1014 Table 2 29 Transferred values of analog inputs of the modules CP 1004 CP 1014 Measured Variable value STAT FS ENG PCT 10 5 V 000C 31500 105 V TE 31500 5 s 108 range range exceeding 0000 30000 0000 nominal range 0000 49 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT basic modules CP 10x4 module IR 1055 IR 1057 peripheries Counters CP 1004 CP 1014 modules contain two counter objects which use inputs DIO to DI3 and they can be set to various operation modes These modes can be basically divided into two groups The first group is represented by modes that always use two inputs The first counter object uses inputs DIO and DI1 the second counter object uses inputs DI2 and DI3 Both counter objects can be set to a random mode within this group and each can work in a different mode The group of basic modes of counter objects constitutes of the following modes No counter One one way counter Two one way counters Two way counter Counter with controlled direction Basic IRC The second group of basic modes of counter objects constitutes of the following modes 9999 9 Two way counter with resetting and capturing Counter with controll
28. 0 1 25 0 s The filtration concerns all data formats of the channel given FS ENG and PCT and is accessible within all measuring ranges Module settings IT 1602 Analog inputs Analog outputs ChannelAlO AIS Channel l4 Al Summary Iv Channel AIO Passing of value Binary value FS Engineering value ENG Normalised value PCT iw Filtering mode Time constant 10 s jw Channel Al2 Voltage range 1 Passing of value Binary value FS V Engineering value ENG Normalised value PCT Filtering mode Enable ignore module error Fig 3 4 19 Analog inputs configuration MV Channel Al1 Thermocouple typ J Passing of value Binary value FS V Engineering value ENG Normalised value PCT Iw Filtering mode Time constant fi s V Channel Al3 Voltage range 0 1 Passing of value Binary value FS Engineering value ENG Normalised value PCT Filtering mode X Cancel Help If we check an item Enable ignoring module error at the bottom side of T 1602 Module settings pane CPU doesn t stop user program performing even when the fatal error of data exchange with this module occurs but it tries to reinitialize the module and renew the communication The actual module status and the validity of data can be found in peripheral system status zone chap 6 5 This function can be used in case we want to keep PLC running even if pe
29. 0 2 of full range Repeatability at constant conditions 0 5 96 of full range Detection of unclosed input no 36 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Analog inputs are brought out to connectors in the field DIGITAL ANALOG INPUTS The fig 2 13 shows a scheme of the signal power supplies connected to analog inputs o o o fos P EN Vif E BE 040V U U LP D NP fo FOS b 0 10V UJ U SIN we 4 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 AT AB A9 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 amp di a Q Q 2 a o N e sxoj o om rco z Io d a 6 IST a ao amp ies fe 6 a a a O a o a non jaoa x E E o o TC LINE 24 V CI BUS CH1 RS 232 DIGITAL SPECIAL INPUTS DIGITAL ANALOG INPUTS Fig 2 13 Typical example of signals connection to analog inputs of CP 1004 CP 1014 basic modules 2 3 4 Counters Binary inputs DIO DI3 can be used as counter inputs Two counter objects are available which can work in several modes one way counter two way counter basic IRC Each object of the counter uses two inputs by default Moreover the first object of the counter enables modes that use all four inputs counter and IRC with reset and capturing In this case the second object of the counter is switched off Even when used for these alternative functions inputs DIO DI3 are still useable as standard binary inputs Inputs are brought out to connectors
30. 1 10 00 0A 14 02 3F F1 ping 192 168 1 10 These commands set IP address of central unit to 192 168 1 10 Firmup1c exe program parameters The Firmup1c exe program is run via the command line e g Start Run and it requires for its functioning the following parameters to be set FIRMUPIC EXE P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 Px Py Pz P1 1 2 3 4 number of COM port serial communication E communication via Ethernet P2 600 1200 38400 serial communication speed XXX XXX XXX XXX IP address PLC communication via Ethernet 215 TXV 004 10 02 7 PLC maintenance P3 0 99 address for communication P4 P5 P6 P7 tfw names of files with firmware Px N display current versions of firmwares in the processor Py P program even if the current versions of firmware is the same or higher Pz Cor E language Czech or English The Firmup1c exe program can also be run from the batch file bat If we run the Firmupic exe without a parameter C or E the following query will be displayed Select language Vyberte jazyk English E Cesky C By pressing the key E or C we select the language which the following dialogues will be displayed in Launching of the program Firmup1c exe examples Load the new firmware via COM2 at a speed of 38400 kBd to CP 1004 with the address 0 after the communication establishment display actual firmware versions in the processor program dialogues will be in Czech Firmuplc exe 2 3
31. 50 60 Hz autocalibration always after module switch on 0 to 10 V 162 8 uV 0 to 5 V 81 38 uV 0 to 2 V 39 06 uV 0 to 1 V 19 53 uV 0 to 20 mA 0 3906 LA 4 to 20 mA 0 3906 uA 0 to 5 mA 0 0977 pA Pt100 1 385 90 to 400 C Pt100 1 391 90 to 400 C Pt1000 1 385 90 to 400 C Pt1000 1 391 90 to 400 C Ni1000 1 617 60 to 200 C Ni1000 1 500 60 to 200 C NTC termistor 12 kQ 25 C 40 to 4 125 C OV100 0 to 100 Q OV1000 0 to 1000 9 All inputs have one joint terminal and are galvanically isolated from internal circuits Joint terminals of analog inputs analog outputs and reference voltage are interconnected Each input is equipped by a red LED diode indication the state when the value of the input signal is outside the measuring range overload or unloading possibly input disconnection Analog inputs are brought out to terminals in the ANALOG INPUTS array Reference voltage for resistance sensors connection is brought out to terminals in the ANALOG OUTPUTS array There is schematic drawing of the connection of various signal sources to analog outputs in the fig 3 4 2 Examples of sensors connection and requirements on wiring are described in the documentation Manual for designing of programmable logic controllers TECOMAT FOXTROT TXV 004 11 02 126 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 AT AB A9 CCI CI CII RI CIC CJ a s Q Q o v
32. Automatic PLC configuration If we have the PLC assembly which we want to configure physically available we switch the PLC power supply on and establish communication with the PLC Then we go back to the folder Hw HW configuration and press the button Load from the PLC fig 5 3 Project manager PLC Address 0 Connection type Not connected Common settings 2 Autogenerate config file C Configuration can t be changed Suppress I0 modules Hw Select type of PLC series HW Configuration Foxtrot PLC Network logical connection Sw Program Cpm Compiler Sending files to PLC Environment Documentation Si Accessories Fig 5 3 PLC FOXTROT configuration settings basic module Project manager PLC Address 0 Connection type Not connected Common settings 2 Autogenerate config file Configuration can t be changed Suppress IO modules Hw Select type of PLC series perc PLC Network logical connection Sw Environment Documentation IA F TXN 113 01 TXN 11501 TXN 11401 TXN 116 01 C LU NNI CPU Extern 1 0 modules Extem CIB Displays QA Accessories PECCO CECA Fig 5 4 PLC FOXTROT configuration settings peripheral module 184 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Based on data in the central unit a list of found modules is produced fig 5 5 The option Keep original setting of imported modules allows the correction of the configuration or adding to it w
33. B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 G8 OOO GOO RxD RTS a o z a a o DIGITAL SPECIAL INPUTS DIGITAL ANALOG INPUTS Fig 2 15 Example of the IRC incremental encoder complete connection 2 3 5 Data provided by the IR 1055 IR 1057 boards Central units CP 1004 CP 1014 provide data connected with the serial communication ETH1 CH1 CH2 interfaces Details are to be found in the manual Serial communication PLC TECOMAT model 32 bits TXV 004 03 02 The peripheral part of the module IR 1055 respectively IR 1057 boards provide information on inputs and outputs The data structure is apparent in the panel O Settings in the Mosaic development environment Fig 2 16 icon lil Structure items have assigned symbolical names which for the IR 1055 IR 1057 boards start always with rO p3 characters In the column Full entry the concrete symbolical name for the given item is always stated If we want to use data in the user program we use this symbolical name or in the column A ias we enter our own symbolical name which can then be used In no case do we use absolute operands since they can alter after the compilation of the user program 40 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers lt gt 1 0 setting gt LJ aa DEC EXP HEX BIN STR ib e n RM1 SDI TBIN_ BDI DIO BOOL rj i0 p3 DI DID 2640 0 DII BDOL dy 0 p3 DI DI 264101 DI2 BDOL dy 10 p3 DI DI2 3410 2
34. Binary outputs are used for control of two condition action and signaling units of the object controlled supplied by the direct voltage of 24 V The submodule PX 7812 contains 3 binary outputs that enable to switch the current carrying capacity of up to 0 5 A each Outputs are galvanically separated from internal circuits of the PLC nevertheless not from 4 inputs on this submodule Inputs are organized into one group with one common connector The common connector of the group has a plus polarity Table 2 21 Basic parameters of binary outputs of the submodule PX 7812 Number of outputs Number of outputs in the group Galvanic isolation from internal circuits yes Outputs type transistor output Common conductor plus Switched voltage max 30 V DC type 24 V DC min 11 V DC Switched current max 0 5 A Common connector current max 2 A Cut off current when opened max 300 uA ON time max 400 us OFF time max 400 us Short circuit protection yes Initial peak current limitation typ 1 4 A Initial peak current OFF time typ 4 ms Short circuit current limitation typ 1 1A Polarity reversal protection yes Inductive load handling external RC element varistor diode The circuit will be inducted to the non active state loads will be switched on the current will circulate through the protective diode of the circuit 26 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers There is on the fig 2 3 represented schematically the connection of
35. Central unit series K No of serial channels 2 Interface Ethernet 10 100 Mb 1 1 1 Integrated Web server yes Applies for the central unit without power supply when power supply is switched on the battery is disconnected the backup period is thus extended When the power supply is switched off the circuits are backed up by an accumulator the battery if fitted is connected only after its discharging chapter 2 1 2 The backup accumulator allows the battery change without any data loss The CH2 serial channel interface is optional using plug in submodules MR 01xx for RS 232 RS 485 and RS 422 M Bus PROFIBUS DP CAN Communication possibilities Channel CH1 e Mode PC communication with superior systems via the EPSNET protocol e Mode PLC data sharing among PLCs in the EPSNET F network e Mode UNI common channel with arbitrary asynchronous communication e Mode MPC data exchange with subordinated PLCs in the EPSNET multimaster network 15 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT basic modules e Mode MDB communication with superior systems via the MODBUS protocol e Mode PFB connection of stations PROFIBUS DP slave Channel CH2 e Mode PC communication with superior systems via the EPSNET protocol Mode PLC data sharing among PLCs in the EPSNET F network Mode UNI common channel with arbitrary asynchronous communication Mode MPC data exchange with subordinated PLCs in the EPSNET multimaster network Mode MDB co
36. DI3 One one way counter UP UP Two one way counters UP UPB UP UPB Two waycouner UP DOWN UP DOWN gounter wth controled dection CKL DR LIT RE OR Basic IRC E eE a aoe enoja capi ring eral lll fee reset and capturing _ IRC with reset and capturing V G N MD a length measuring selectable during operation DIO DI3 Period and phase shift measuring period both functions switcheable during input selectable during operation operation DIO DI3 measure bermeen Dn ano measured between DI1 a DIO Overview of various signals abbreviations UP impulse input for counter incrementation UPB impulse input for B counter incrementation DOWN impulse input for counter decrementation CLK impulse input for counter DIR counter direction CLR counter reset CAP capturing counter value V IRC first track G IRC second track NI IRC clearing pulse MD measuring contact As results from the table 3 3 6 both counter objects can be set to different mode combinations providing that the first object uses inputs DIO and DI1 first 5 modes only If the first object uses all DIO to DI3 inputs then the second object is switched off According to the configuration we can have up to 4 simple one way counters or 2 simple two way counters IRC or 1 counter IRC including reset and capturing available Modes of imp
37. FOXTROT CP 101x module display Ol 1073 The transferred value of the FS variable is an int type variable The value 0 corresponds to the minimum value of the input unipolar value and the value 31 500 corresponds to the maximum value It applies that 100 of the nominal range of the analog input corresponds to the value of FS 30000 The transferred value in the ENG variable is a real type variable and represents the current in volts The transferred value in the PCT variable is a real type variable and represents the percentage relation between nominal and measured value of the analog input The PCT variable is related to the FS variable It applies that for the value FS 0 is the PCT 0 and for the value FS 30000 the PCT 100 The PCT variable can reach a maximum value of 105 which corresponds to FS 31500 Module settings IR 1056 Binary I0 Analog inputs Analog outputs MV Channel 400 MV Channel 401 0 s 10V D e 10v Accept value Accept value C Binary value FS Engineering value ENG ENI Normalised value PCT C Normalised value PCT Output during blocking Output during blocking Freeze C Freeze C Defined status Defined status Enable ignore module error X Cancel Help Obr 2 39 Analog outputs configuration The behaviour of outputs in the HALT mode can be defined in two ways If we mark the item Freeze then after the mode transition to the HALT mode the analog output stays set
38. Fixed Note jE a ES E aae rl pO DI l ri p DI DIO l rl p DI DI1 dl rl p DI DI2 l r1_p0_DI DI3 dl 1_p0_DI DI4 dl rl pO DI DIS l r1_p0_DI DIG l rl p DI DI dl rl p DI DIS l r1_p0_DI DI9 l n_pO_DI DI10 il r1 pO DI DI11 ri pO DIPw l n_p0_DIPW DIPO l rl pO DIPw DIP1 i rl p DIPw DIP2 l rl p DIPwW DIP3 rl pO CNT IN1 i rl pO CNT IN1 7SCNT l rl p CNT IN1 VALA l r1_PO_CNT_INT VALB dl rl pO CNT IN2 ri p CNT OUTI rl p CNT DLIT1 CCNT E r1 p CNT OUT1 SET AB A A8 AS B2 B3 B4 B5 BB B B8 B3 4880 0 2280 1 4880 2 4880 3 880 4 4880 5 4880 6 4880 7 4881 0 881 1 481 2 281 3 4482 0 882 1 4X82 2 482 3 RW 84 AXL85 ZLI 2x94 10 ZTG ZYL18 HCNT_OUT2 TCNTF QUT 3 r1 p CNT DUT2 XY22 5 Jf OK X Cancel Help Fig 3 1 5 IB 1301 module data structure Input data DI binary input values 16x boolean type D Die Dib Di4 DB Di2 Dit DIO 6 0 14 bit 7 5 4 3 2 A Oo o o o Dm DIO DO Di8 15 13 12 11 10 9 DIO DI3 binary inputs useable for counters DI4 DI11 standard binary inputs bit 8 DIP binary input values with short impulse detection 16x boolean type o 0 o o DIP3 DIP2 DIP1 DIPO z 6 5 4 3 2 E 0 o Lo ww 9 3p 9 p 9 jq 9 9 1 1 4 9 2 df 40 9 8 DIPO DIP3 input values DIO DI3 with artificial extension of the selected level into one cycle detec
39. K series central unit 4 binary inputs 24 V useable as counter inputs 4 optional inputs binary 24 V analog 0 10 V 10 bits 6 relay inputs 250 V CP 1004 2 serial channels CH1 RS 232 CH2 optional TXN 110 04 1 Ethernet 10 100 Mb interface 1 TCL2 bus line for connecting peripheral units 1 CIB bus line possibility of fitting the submodule with binary inputs and outputs K series central unit 6 optional inputs binary 24 V analog unipolar voltage and current ranges passive resistant sensors 16 bits 2 analog inputs 0 10 V 10 bits 6 relay inputs 250 V 2 serial channels CH1 RS 232 CH2 optional 1 Ethernet 10 100 Mb interface 1 TCL2 bus line for connecting peripheral units 1 CIB bus line possibility of fitting the submodule with binary inputs and outputs configuration similar to CP 1004 CP 1014 LCD display 4 x 20 characters 6 user push buttons TAN AAO 14 configuration similar to CP 1005 CP 1015 LCD display 4 x 20 characters 6 user push buttons VASPRETIBS While creating a new project within the Mosaic development environment we will be asked to choose the system which we will be programming The part of the system CP 1005 TXN 110 05 12 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers selection is also a selection of the basic module This setting is located in the Project manager in the node Hw PLC series selection and can be changed anytime fig 2 1 Project manager PLC Address 0 Ay U
40. NEC NS ee ZBE ee a ENE UI n 9 n LE X e x a qw opo sA 0 ME s We ror K b j J P Dn b n j e Mm b NEC NEUE NE We u Oo I0 o p On Aa e qe Table 2 54 Code table of ASCII characters 128 255 80 FF for the code page CP1252 western European ec Ex Fx d j BE GENE NE CERE a 6 ae eee a a 5c e ee ENT EE E EE WEE SW ug ja Lu ge us LoT Py j 84 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Table 2 55 Code table of ASCII characters 128 255 80 FF for the code page CP1253 Greek alphabet code 8x 9x Ax Bx Cx Dx SEx Fx 2 5 2 Keybuttons coding There are 6 buttons designated for the use in the application that are marked with arrow tools sign enter and C clear These buttons are coded according to the table 2 56 The system supports the function autorepeat periodic transmission of the button code when pressed for a long time and the possibility of switching on the transmission of so called terminal character generated by the release of the pressed button Table 2 56 Keybuttons coding ee l terminal character release of the pressed button The button MODE serves for switching of the display between system and user mode of displaying and it can not be used for the application Conversely in the system mode of the display buttons marked by arrow tools are used for listin
41. NI MD 1 approval of input MD FMD 0 counter clearing from input MD 1 capturing of the current value of the counter into the VALB variable from the MD input Impulse length measurement The counter object enables measuring of the impulse length on any of the four DIO DI3 inputs This mode can be set in the first counter object only The second object must be switched off The length of the log 1 level period is measured by the VALA variable the length of the log 0 level period is measured by the VALB variable The validity of the measured values is indicated by tags EV valid length of the log 1 level and EG valid length of the log 0 level in the status word The measured values are stated in microseconds the values represent the average value of the last eight measurings by IR 1055 board It is possible to activate the measuring EN bit and select the measured input NO and IN1 bits using the control word SCNT counter status word 0 0 0 0 0 0 EG EV uh 6 a 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 da 12 11 10 9 8 EV 1 valid length of the log 1 level tag EG 1 valid length of the log O level tag CCNT counter control word 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EN 7 6 5 4 3 2 A 0 IN1 INO 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 EN 0 measuring deactivated 1 measuring activated IN1 INO selection of measured input 00 input DIO 01 input DH
42. RS 232 interface is connected to the terminal A3 Table 2 3 The connection of the terminal A of PLC FOXTROT basic modules CIB line CIB RTS modem sending prompt All modules of the PLC FOXTROT set are equipped with the plastic protection case and with the holder for module fitting onto the U bar ATTENTION Modules contain components sensitive to electrostatic charge therefore user guides for these circuits must be abided The manipulation is undertaken on the module that is disconnected from the power supply only this applies both for module itself as well as for input and output signals 2 1 CENTRAL UNIT The central unit executes its own user program and contains basic functions necessary for the PLC This implies that the PLC must contain a central unit Every central unit has a character assigned which designates its series Each series of central units has its specific features important for the translator of the user program e g mapping and range of a memory range of an instruction file etc The central unit contains 192 KB backed up CMOS RAM memory for user programs 64 KB backed up CMOS RAM memory for user tables 256 KB EEPROM flash memory for backing up of user programs and tables 2 MB EEPROM flash memory for projects archiving chapter 5 5 3 512 KB additional memory for DataBox data archiving 64 KB user registers RTC 2 serial channels first one with a fixed interface RS 232 and second one with an
43. Repeated transfer of the code of the pressed button is activated only after the autorepeat delay expiration if the autorepeat is set After the release of the pressed button the terminal character FF is broadcasted by a single application if the broadcasting of the terminal character is set Output data Ol1073 VideoRam ASCII array of characters designated for displaying 80x usint type The display processor firstly decodes the text according to the set character set and afterwards displays relevant characters on the display Characters sets available are described in the chapter 2 5 1 2 5 4 Initialization of the Ol 1073 display The panel for the Ol 1073 display parameters setting can be open in the Project manager in the tag HW HW configuration fig 2 43 In the folder Central module on the 86 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Project manager PLC Address 0 Connection type Not connecte Common settings utogenerate config file Configuration can t be changed Suppress 10 modules Hw Select type of PLC series HW Configuration PLC Network logical conr Sw Environment Documentation 24V GND CE 22 TCL2 Fig 2 43 Basic module CP 1014 configuration Module settings 01 1073 Character Set Cyrillic 1251 West European 1252 C GREEK 1253 1500 Delay of autorepeat key v Use end delimiter Setup of user keys Don t use var
44. a schematic overview of switchers connection on fig 2 1 3 Attention It is necessary to realize that connectors GND in the 24 V DC and DIGITAL SPECIAL INPUTS fields are galvanically connected inside the system It is not recommended to connect the GND connector in the DIGITAL SPECIAL INPUTS field to the negative terminal of the system power supply including inputs because the cycle would be closed by the second GND connector and induction of interfering signals would be hindered 24V U T f L4 ggL 43 Ai A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 AB A9 Bi B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 amp lalelelelezlelele a e lze s e seleslea ne S le2l eilalelel l ele Z ao ag8 a8 ao a x o x ox a e e i eg a keea o TC LINE 24 V C BUS CH1 RS 232 DIGITAL SPECIAL INPUTS DIGITAL ANALOG INPUTS Fig 2 11 Typical example of switchers connection to the binary inputs of CP 1004 CP 1014 modules 2 3 2 Relay outputs Relay outputs are instrumental to control of two condition action and signaling elements of the controlled object that are supplied by alternating or direct current up to 250V Outputs are realized by a switching voltage free contact of the relay brought out within a group with one joint connector The CP 1004 basic module contains 6 relay inputs DOO DO5 organized in two groups of three inputs with the joint connector Inputs are galvanically separated both fr
45. and secondary winding of the transformer a Cu shielding foil must be wound connected to the inside grounding terminal of the case or the windings must be arranged is such a manner that the capacity between them is minimized It is recommended to add a switch to the joint PLC power supply to be able to switch off the power supply when adjusting programs during the maintenance repairs etc Power supplies must be realized via screened cables The cable screening must be connected to the main terminal board of the case on the side of the transformer only The minimum conductor diameter of cables interconnected to the main grounding terminal of the case must be 2 5 mm 164 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Attention 24 V DC 25 15 voltage is used as a power supply of the PLC Be careful not to confuse the polarity when connecting the supply because it would cause a short circuit In no case 24 V voltage can be connected to the TCL2 bus terminals as this could damage circuits of the serial interface of the bus 4 5 2 Power supply of input and output circuits The input circuits switches of peripheral modules can be supplied by the same power supply as these modules Then indeed they have no galvanic isolation Input circuits of basic modules are always supplied from the same power supply as these modules are The power supply must be dimensioned according to the specific power drain of the modules and
46. detection of short impulses for the log 1 state on then the short term value log 1 is extended until the next cycle turn The inputs state with the short impulse detection switched on is contained in the DIP variable 1 input DIn 0 data transfer f to CPU transferred data bit DI n 1 1 1 bit DIP n 1 0 1 Fig 3 3 9 Detection of short impulses into log 0 function tp pulse width t PLC cycle period 1 input Din n 0 I tp data transfer i to CPU transferred data bit DI n 0 0 0 bit DIP n 0 1 0 Fig 3 3 10 Detection of short impulses into log 1 function t pulse width te PLC cycle period Binary outputs The binary inputs state is contained in the DO variable The configuration can be found in the folder Binary IO Fig 3 3 8 By ticking the option Switch on the transfer of binary inputs we can enable the transfer of current states of all six inputs into the PLC notepad If this option is not ticked relevant values are not transferred and outputs are not set Counters The IR 1501 module contains two counter objects that use inputs DIO to DI3 and they can be set to several operation modes These modes can be divided into two groups The first group is represented by modes that always use two inputs The first counter object uses inputs DIO and DI1 the second counter object uses inputs DI2 and DI3 Both counter objects can be set to a random mode from this group and each can work in a different mo
47. disconnected or reprogrammed If the editing intervention is unintentional it is sufficient to switch the PLC off and on again the original program will be downloaded from EEPROM program is compiled for another series of central units The compiler was set to another series of central units therefore it is necessary to select the correct series of the central unit in the compiler menu and compile the user program again When the compiler was set correctly then it is designated for a higher version of system software than the version in the central unit of your PLC This has to be cleared either by using an older compiler version or by replacing the system software in the central unit attempt to program non existing EEPROM The EEPROM backup memory is disconnected EEPROM programming failed Data saved at the EEPROM backup memory does not comply with data being entered An EEPROM fault could be a possible cause of this problem Central unit hardware errors 80 0C 0000 80 44 0001 80 44 0002 80 44 0003 80 44 0004 RTC error The real time circuit RTC does not run which results in a failure of all PLC time functions It means more than likely that the backup battery is exhausted and must be replaced or charged If the backup battery is not exhausted than the central unit must be repaired by a specialist identification error the record cannot be read identification error no record identification error invalid record
48. display project opening graphical display project is not accessible error at graphical display project header reading error at graphical display project reading file stated in graphical display project does not exist information about file stated in graphical display project can not be found the length of file does not correspond to data in graphical display project time of file modification does not correspond to data in graphical display project names in the graphical display project file are too long error in the graphical display project file small space in the stack for graphical display communication driver small space in the stack for synchronization of file with display graphical display project is empty it does not contain any file invalid folder of graphical display project invalid length of received initialization table in the module serial channel initialization table length is invalid incorrect number of communication channel invalid mode of communication channel invalid combination of activated variables invalid length of activated variable non supported type of analog channel unsupported data conversion type incorrect number of communication channel error counter mode non existing module non conforming module type initialization for another type invalid rack address higher than the maximum possible module with unknown operation module identification read error the record cannot be read module identificat
49. fitting the module in the position under run when module initialization is performed module operation running data valid normal status module reported a critical error that stopped the user program execution another type of module than declared by the user program was found during module initialization after power supply switch on 6 6 COMMUNICATION WITH THE MASTER SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING Connection of the PLC to the superior system usually a PC is necessary since each PLC must be programmed If there are problems in communication between the PLC and PC proceed according to the following instructions PLC check 1 Is a power supply brought onto the PLC No Make correction Yes Proceed as specified at point 2 2 Was the switching sequence of the central unit completed and is the unit in RUN or HALT mode see chapter 5 3 No The central unit reports a hardware error see table 5 2 communication is not possible Yes Proceed as specified at point 3 211 TXV 004 10 02 6 Diagnostics and troubleshooting 3 For serial channels Are LED diodes of the particular channel flashing during communication on the central unit No LED is flashing a The submodule of the MR 01xx interface on the particular channel is not fitted if the interface is optional or a submodule for another interface is fitted b The error is within the PC cable or adapter of the serial interface RS 485 If you use the adapter proceed as specified
50. from internal circuits Joint terminals of analog inputs analog outputs and reference voltage are interconnected 128 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Table 3 4 8 Basic parameters of analog inputs of the IT 1601 module Module type Number of outputs 2 Number of outputs in group 2 Output type active voltage output Galvanic isolation from internal circuits yes Joint conductor minus External supply none Transfer time 10 us Protection type integrated surge guards Insulation potentials at normal operating none conditions Digital display resolution 10 bits Output range resolution 1 LSB Max output value 105 upper limit of input range Max allowed permanent overload without 20 V each terminal AO against damage AGND Max output current 10 mA Analog output error max error at 25 2 of full range thermal coefficient 0 3 of full range K linearity 0 7 of full range repeatability at steady conditions 0 5 of full range Analog outputs are brought out to terminals in the ANALOG OUTPUTS array There is a schematic drawing of the connection of the load to analog outputs in fig 3 4 3 Q ra o lt ANALOG OUTPUTS Vref gt x A d 24V DC CL2 E TC LINE Fig 3 4 3 Typical example of load connection to analog outputs of the IT 1601module 3 4 1 3 Data provided by the IT 1601 module The IT 1601 periphe
51. in several modes one way counter two way counter basic IRC Each counter object uses standardly two inputs Moreover the first counter object enables 93 TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules IB 1301 module modes that use all four inputs counter and IRC with resetting and capturing impulse length measuring period and phase shift measuring In this case the second counter object is switched off Even when used for these alternative functions inputs DIO DI3 are useable also as standard binary inputs Inputs are brought out to terminals within the top array DIGITAL INPUTS Electric parameters of inputs are stated in the table 3 1 3 time parameters in the table 3 1 4 and a modes overview in the table 3 1 5 Table 3 1 4 Time parameters of counters inputs of the module IB 1301 Module type Counters modes Input frequency 5 kHz Pulse width min 50 us Delay from log 0 to log 1 5 us Delay from log 1 to log 0 5 us Register range 0 up to 4 294 967 295 32 bits Incremental sensors IRC Symmetric signal frequency V G 1 25 kHz Pulse width V G NI MD min 50 us Delay from log 0 to log 1 5 us Delay from log 1 to log 0 5 us Hegister range to 4 294 967 295 32 bits Impulse length measuring period and phase shift measuring Input frequency 0 1 up to 5000 Hz Pulse width 50 up to 10 000 000 us Table 3 1 5 Overview of counter modes Counter mode Counter object 1 Counter object 2 signal DIO DI1 DI2 DI3 DI
52. input If the value log 0 appears on the input during the cycle period then it will stay recorded in the module memory until the nearest data transfer to the central unit is undertaken even though the value log 1 is on the input at the time of the data transfer 101 TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules IB 1301 module 1 input DIn data transfer tc to CPU transferred data bit DI n bit DIP n 1 0 1 Fig 3 1 8 Detection of short impulses into log 0 function tp pulse width t PLC cycle period The same applies by analogy for an input signal which is mainly in log 0 state and short impulses to log 1 appear within We switch the detection of short impulses for the log 1 state on and the short term value log 1 at the input is extended until the cycle turn The inputs state with switched on short impulse detection is contained in the DIP variable 1 input Din B 0 _ tp e data transfer i to CPU i transferred data bit DI n 0 0 0 bit DIP n 0 1 0 Fig 3 1 9 Detection of short impulses into log 1 function tp pulse width te PLC cycle period Counters The IB 1301module contains two counter objects which use inputs DIO to DI3 and they can be set to several operation modes These modes can be divided into two groups The first group is represented by modes that always use two inputs The first counter object uses inputs DIO and DI1 the second counter object uses inputs D
53. input value exceeded the nominal range Aln analog input value int type The minimum input value matches with the value 0 the maximum value matches with the value 31500 whereas is valid that 10096 of the nominal range of the analog input matches the value FS 30000 Aln analog input value real type Value of measured voltage in volts Aln analog input value real type The percentage relation between the measured and the nominal value of the analog input For the value FS 0 applies the value PCT 0 and for the value FS 30000 applies the value PCT 100 Output data DO binary output values 8times boolean type 0 o DOS DO4 DO3 DO2 DO DOO bit 7 6 29 4 KS 2 1 0 DOO DO5 relay outputs CNT OUT1 counter output object 1 TCNTF OUT structure CNT_OUT1 CCNT counter control word1 16times boolean type 0 FMD MD N FC SET RES EN bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 A 0 INT INO 0 MOD FCB SETB RESB bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 EN 0 counter 1 stopped 1 counter 1 counts RES 1 counter 1 reset and clearing SET 1 counter 1 set to the SET value 43 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT basic modules CP 10x4 module IR 1055 IR 1057 peripheries FC 0 counter 1 runs free 1 clear counter 1 from the SET value gained NI 1 clear counter 1 from the signal NI MD 1 MD signal capturing approved FMD 0 clear counter 1 from MD signal 1 capture current value of the cou
54. is described in the chapter 4 The display is operated in the character mode It enables to display 256 characters of the character set selected during the initialization of the user program There are following Windows character sets available CP1250 WinLatin2 central European CP1251 WinCyrillic Cyrillic alohabet CP1252 WinLatin1 western European CP1253 WinGreek Greek alphabet All mentioned character sets have identical coding of the first 128 characters Codes 0 31 contain graphical characters for creating of lines and bar graphs and for displaying of key characters Codes 32 127 correspond to the standard ASCII coding Codes 128 255 differs according to the selected code page and contain characters of national alphabets and other characters Individual characters and their coding are shown in following tables 82 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Tale 2 51 Code table of ASCII characters 0 127 00 7F m n Thi Trim T T Th trt je G Ww x X UJ Table 2 52 Code table of ASCII characters 128 255 80 FF for the code page CP1250 central European x6 S x d Dal cue cen e 83 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT CP 101x module display Ol 1073 Table 2 53 Code table of ASCII characters 128 255 80 FF for the code page CP1251 Cyrillic alphabet Cx Cx Dx Ex Fx ee ee ee EMEN UE ee ee
55. length measuring period and phase shift measuring Counter mode Counter object 1 Counter object 2 signal DIO DI1 DI2 DI3 DI2 DI3 DOWN UP DOWN ani Vv Two way counter with reset and UP capturing Pulse length measuring input selectable during operation DIO DI3 operation operation DIO DI3 UP pulse input for counter incrementation CLK pulse input for counter CAP counter capturing value V IRC first track G IRC second track NI IRC zero pulse MD measuring contact 38 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers As it can be seen in the table 2 28 both counter objects can be adjusted to different mode combinations providing the first object uses the inputs DIO and DI1 only first 5 modes If the first object uses all DIO to DI3 inputs then the second object is switched off According to the configuration there are up to 4 simple one way counters or 2 simple two way counters incremental encoder or 1 counter incremental encoder including reset and capturing available The meaning of each function is described in chapter 2 3 6 Counter inputs are connected in the same manner as standard inputs as can be seen in fig 2 11 In fig 2 14 and 2 15 are shown examples of the IRC position sensors connection Attention For older variant named IR 1055 pulse length measuring and period and phase shift measuring modes are assigned for periodical signals only Since these measurings are loaded with acc
56. lighting up of the relevant LED diode Binary input relays contacts are brought out to terminals in the DIGITAL OUTPUTS array A schematic drawing of connections of loads powered by independent sources is shown in fig 2 26 Protection against overload and short circuit is undertaken using safety fuses for each input or for each group The rated voltage and type of fuse is selected for each load and character of load differently while considering the maximum voltage and overload capacity of outputs or group of outputs For example when using tube fuses with a T and F fuse characteristic and a switching rate of 35 A it is possible to use a rated current of 3 A per fuse per output and fuses of up to 10A when protecting a joint group conductor 62 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Table 2 32 Basic parameters of relay outputs Number of inputs 6 Number of groups x number of outputs in 2x3 group Galvanic isolation from internal circuits yes even among groups Diagnostics signalization of the excited output on the panel Type of outputs electromechanical relay non protected output Contact type switching Switching voltage max 250 V min 5 V Switching current max 3 A min 100 mA Short term overload of output max 4 A Voltage through joint terminal max 10 A Time of contact closure type 10 ms Time of contact opening type 4 ms Threshold limits of switched loads for resistant load max 3 A at 30 V DC or 230 V AC DC13 for in
57. of cycle time monitoring division by zero table instruction above the notepad exceeded its range source data block defined out of range data destination block defined out of range user program fault during continuous check found invalid map length of the new user program invalid protection character CRC of the map of the new user program map at RAM invalid protection character CRC of the entire new program at RAM program is compiled for another series if central units EEPROM programming failed list of on line changes missing list of on line changes has incorrect CRC initialization table missing maximum variable size exceeded invalid rack address higher than the maximum possible initialization not finished invalid software of peripheral module non existing module module type in disagreement initialization designated for a different type module does not support these on line changes invalid communication channel number invalid communication channel mode invalid length of initialization table of serial channel non existing auxiliary table invalid speed in the initialization table of serial channel station address collision invalid number of participants of network or data blocks the number of participants of network exceeds the number of lines non permissible number of the local port unknown protocol of the Ethernet interface error connection serial channel is not in required mode maximum quantity of transmi
58. optional interface changeable by using submodules RS 232 RS 485 RS 422 Ethernet 10 100 Mb interface 1 TCL2 bus line for connection of peripheral units e 1 CIB bus line 14 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers e slot for MMC SD card older basic modules that have not a hole for card plug in on the side supports only RS MMC RS marking means reduced size e integrated Web server chapter 5 7 This is a K series central unit with an instruction file the part of which are arithmetic operations with numbers with a fixed base point of the size 32 bits with or without sign within a floating point floating point single precision 32 bits and double precision 64 bits PID regulator instruction operator panel support TER instruction and support of a higher programming language Its mode and diagnostic reports are shown on a seven segment display Table 2 4 Basic parameters of the central unit Real time circuit es User program and table memory 192464 KB EEPROM backup memory of the yes program Internal DataBox additional data 512 KB memory Project archiving memory 2 MB Slot for the MMC SD card yes Backup of RAM and RTC without battery typ 500 h with battery typ 20 000 h Cycle time of 1k of log instructions 0 2 ms Number of user registers 64 KB number of remnant registers 32 KB Number of IEC timers 4096 Number of IEC counters 8192 Binary input and output types 130 Instruction length 2 10 bytes
59. peripheral module undertake a new compilation and load the repaired user program into the PLC again This error also occurs in a situation when the required function is added to a newer firmware version than the one loaded in this peripheral module unsupported data conversion type The requested data conversion type is not supported by the central unit The data conversion during which the error occurred is undertaken during the information exchange with the peripheral module address of which is a part of the error code This error occurs when the requested data conversion type was included only in the new firmware version that was not uploaded into the central unit It is necessary to update the central unit firmware invalid counter mode The required counter mode is not supported by the peripheral module It is necessary to verify the correctness of configuration setup of the particular peripheral module undertake a new compilation and load the repaired user program into the PLC again This error also occurs in a situation when the required function is added to a newer firmware version than the one loaded in this peripheral module It is necessary to upload the module firmware non existing module In the hardware configuration such module operation is set that does not exist in a real unit Set the configuration in compliance with the reality either manually or by loading the data from the PLC non corresponding module type ini
60. power losses on input circuits table 4 4 Circuits switched by binary outputs must be supplied by an independent power supply or at least by an independent transformer winding The supply source must be dimensioned according to the concrete input of the load and performance losses of input circuits table 4 5 4 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATION The FOXTROT PLC is connected to other systems using serial lines The CH1 serial channel has a fixed RS 232 interface The CH2 channel has an optional interface For the interface selection MR 01xx plug in submodules are used allowing connection via interfaces RS 232 RS 485 or RS 422 Another possible connection to other systems represents the Ethernet 10 100 Mb interface For connection of FOXTROT system components to other systems e g to PC via the serial line any of the interfaces being offered can be used chapter 2 2 2 The interface is selected according to the type of interface contained in the system being connected If this interface with its parameters is not satisfactory longer distance higher level of interference low speed connection of more participants at a time a corresponding serial interface converter must be used on the side of the system being connected ES 4 8 Order numbers of cables for connection of the PLC to other participants Modification 0205 cable UTP Ethernet 10 100 Mb standard direct TXN 102 05 xx KB 0206 cable UTP Ethernet 10 100 Mb crossed TXN 102 06 xx
61. switching devices while the PX 7811 submodule is fitted There is on the fig 2 4 represented schematically the connection of switching devices and loads while the PX 7812 submodule is fitted CH2 OPTIONAL SUBMODULE e g RS 232 RS 485 E DIGITAL OUTPUTS Ss e iia o tia az c por pos pog Aasa NE z EH tlk c x Q o o o o o o Velger n es OE lE o EEE t e a amp ie tr te C1 ca 63 C4 65 C8 G7 C8 C9 D1 D2 D3 D4 DS D6 D7 D8 D9 Fig 2 3 Typical example of switching devices connection to the basic module CP 10xx while the PX 7811 submodule is fitted on the CH2 channel CH2 OPTIONAL SUBMODULE e g RS 232 RS 485 DIGITAL OUTPUTS 1 COM1 amp R NOLL ff 24V U o oo o oe Fig 2 4 Typical example of switching devices and loads connection to the basic module CP 10xx while the PX 7812 submodule is fitted on the CH2 channel Initialization of PX 7811 and PX 7812 submodules Owing to the fact that PX 7811 and PX 7812 submodules engage the channel CH2 position we treat them as a special mode of the serial channel The UPD mode is concerned We open in the Project manager the window HW HW configuration In the tag Central 27 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT basic modules Channel parameters setting Com chann
62. tei lecomal PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS QD UA SAS Wa is Ep Wi e fs n6 OAS SH Ame Vi Foxtrot RUN ERROR RUN BLK RUN BLK 45 45 m BE 1 8 i 8 0 9 0 9 ADR ADR CP 1004 ETHERNET MODE pne eoo oco00 225222929 925222502522 DIGITAL OUTPUTS CH2 OPTIONAL SUBMODULE e g RS 232 RS 485 la DIGITAL OUTPUTS 3 8 8 8 818 818 o 8 8 joj d 818 EE ERETHSHEHH TECOMAT FOXTROT PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS Content TECOMAT FOXTROT PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS 11 issue August 2011 CONTENT INTRODUCTION TO THE TECOMAT FOXTROT PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC o prie E c X 5 dr USEC TON Gas desti Sewers DU Rc Re Rcx RR toe cena D ce chinn EROR A eae eine abeeen Cid 5 1 2 TECOMAT FOXTROT system features ssssssssseene 6 1 3 DEGOMAT TOXPROT SOL ideis tbi iot thoi oboe Hbi ette 7 1 4 Basie PLC patatmeters uere rene rne exe rne exe rne exe rra be pre bx pre eee enin 8 PLC FOXTROT BASIC MODULES kiere conan Dad te cuc LO add des sa ect dad etas 12 IM iiir rc Pc eee 14 2 1 1 Indication elements and setting options eesseeeeeeeeeeee 16 2 1 2 Program memory and RTC power supply backup eessussses 18 2 2 Communication interfaces sse eene enne enne 19 212 T Sertalchanpielsse fico reiecta exeat vedere Dac esed cene bon Quen en an ERR E RAE 19 2 2 2 Exchan
63. the controlled object powered by a 24V direct current The OS 1401 peripheral module contains 12 binary outputs DOO DO11 Outputs DOO DO3 enable the switching of the current load of up to 2 A each together max 4 4 A Outputs DO4 DO11 enable the switching of the current load of up to 0 5 A each Outputs have galvanic isolation from internal circuits of the PLC The output excitation switching is signalized by lighting up of the LED diode There is one group of outputs using a common terminal The common terminal has a negative polarity 105 TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules OS 1401 module Table 3 2 3 Basic parameters of binary outputs of the OS 1401 module Module type Number of inputs 12 Number of groups 12 Galvanic isolation from internal circuits yes Diagnostics Signalization of excited input on panel Type of outputs Transistor output Joint conductor Plus Switching voltage 9 6 to 28 8 V DC Switching current max 2 A DOO DO3 max 0 5 A DO4 DO11 Current through the joint terminal max 4 4 A sum of DOO DO3 max 9 A sum of DOO DO11 Residual current while the contact is open max 300 uA Time of contact closure max 400 us Time of contact opening max 400 us Short circuit protection yes Limitation of launch peak current type 7 5 A Time of disconnection of launch peak current type 4 ms Limitation of short circuit current type 4 A Protection against the reversal of poles yes Treatment o
64. the value of log 1 the counter increases its content by 1 consequently if the DIR input has the value of log 0 the counter decreases its content by 1 In the status word in the EV bit the log 1 during one PLC cycle will show as an entering edge tag on the input If the resultant content of the counter is the same as the SET variable value then in the status word in the PS bit the log 1 during one PLC cycle will show as an achieved preset tag If simultaneously the FC bit is set to log 1 in the control word the counter content will be automatically cleared The control word can also control the counters run EN bit reset the counter HES bit or set its content to a SET variable value entering edge of the SET bit SCNT counter status word 0 0 0 PS 0 0 0 EV uf 6 5 4 3 2 B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 do 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 EV 1 entering edge tag on input CLK PS 1 achieved preset tag 53 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT basic modules CP 10x4 module IR 1055 IR 1057 peripheries CCNT counter control word 0 0 0 0 FC SET RES EN d 6 ES 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 EN 0 counter stopped 1 counter counts RES 1 counter resetting and clearing SET 1 setting counter to the SET variable value FC 0 counter free run 1 clearing the counter after variable SET value is gained Basic IRC The counter obje
65. the line connected 1200 m The maximum length applies to twisted and shielded cable and a communication rate of max 120 kBd Table 2 43 Connection of the terminal board of the serial channel CH2 while submodule MR 0124 is fitted 5V supply output 5V GND signal ground CTS modem sending readiness level T CTS modem sending readiness level RxD data received level TxD data sent level TxD data sent level RxD data received level 22 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers 2 2 2 4 PLC FOXTROT connection to the CAN bus MR 0151 submodules with the pair of drivers SJA1000 and MR 0161 with one driver SJA1000 enable the connection of the PLC FOXTROT to the CAN network with transfer rates of 1 MBd 500 250 125 50 or 20 kBd They can only be used in CSJ mode It is necessary to terminate the communication lines on both ends to ensure correct functioning It is undertaken by connection of terminals TxRx with BT and TxRx s BT Table 2 14 Connection of the terminal board of the serial channel CH2 while submodule MR 0161 is fitted GND signal ground TxRx data received and sent level TxRx data received and sent level TxRx data received and sent level Table 2 15 Connection of the terminal board of the serial channel CH2 while submodule MR 0160 is fitted 5V supply output 5V GND signal ground BT CAN line termination output BT CAN lin
66. the mode of automatic switching of communication directions and a sufficient response time must be set on the central unit The Mosaic development environment and some visualizations support the RTS signal Only TxD with RTS is flashing The output part of the adapter or the cable between the adapter and PLC is defective TxD with RTS and RxD is flashing alternatively Communication is correct the problem is in the cable between the adapter and the PC or within the PC Proceed as specified at point 21 Cable check 21 Is the cable in the PC in the right COM or USB or Ethernet port No Make corrections Yes Proceed as specified at point 22 22 Are correct cables used No Make corrections Yes f possible use another cable of the same type Proceed as specified at point 31 PC check 31 Are there other drivers mouse driver IR port driver etc installed on the serial port COM that you use Yes There is a collision of drivers even when a device requiring this driver is not connected Communication through another COM port must be used or the driver must be uninstalled No Some programs running under Windows do not manage to switch quickly enough from transmission to reception This problem can be easily solved by setting a sufficiently long response time of the PLC central unit or by reducing the communication speed 213 TXV 004 10 02 7 PLC maintenance 7 PLC MAINTENANCE According to this chapter the PLC maintenance is
67. the object controlled will be cleared Searching for such errors is significantly more difficult at the stage of the control program debugging Testing of input and output signals can also be done using the so called fixation which is accessible in the Mosaic in the panel Setting V V This procedure is applicable at any time at the stage of the user program debugging and later during the servicing of connected technologies The fixed value keeps its set value regardless of the user program and serial communication too The state of fixation is indicated on the display of the central unit see table 5 3 5 7 FILE SYSTEM AND WEB SERVER Basic modules CP 10xx contain a slot for a memory card of the MMC and SD types Individual files on cards can be saved in file systems FAT12 FAT16 or FAT32 Older basic modules CP 10xx that have not a hole for card plug in on the side support reduced size MMC only Cards must be formatted beforehand the card cannot be formatted in the PLC and if possible clear the card can be also used for archivation of other files connected with the application but with the increasing number of files the access to the card is slowed down It is also important to take into consideration the card s lifetime which is round 100 000 entries Memory card application The Mosaic enables the entry of files to the memory card inserted in the central unit via the option PLC File system PLC All files transferred via the Mosaic a
68. the system mode codes of the pressed buttons are not sent for processing to the user program and thus none unwanted interference occurs within By another short stroke of the button MODE we return back to the user mode The display will start displaying characters defined by the user program and transfer codes of pressed buttons to the user program again RUN mode In the RUN mode the PLC reads values of input signals from input units executes instructions from the user program and enters the calculated values of output signals into the output units The RUN mode is signalized by flashing of the RUN LED diode on the central unit If the RUN diodes on peripheral modules operated are flashing too it indicates that a data transfer between the central unit and peripheral modules is running LED ERR diodes are off The G lights on the seven segment indicator and the sign Run is displayed in the left top corner 174 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers If the analyzer is running which is the part of the GraphMaker component in the Mosaic development environment the seven segment indicator does not indicate this fact it is indicated on the display behind the sign Run by a small A character If the fixation of signals of peripheral modules is active which is accessible in the Mosaic development environment in the panel Setting V V the F lights on the seven segment indicator and on the display behind the sign Run a small ch
69. to the last value entered by the user program If we mark the item Defined state then after the mode transition to the HALT mode on the analog output is set the value entered within the correspondent array This entered value has a format similar to the selected transmitted variable This means that if we use the FS format the value is of the int type within the range 0 31500 if we use the ENG format the value is of the real type within the range O 10 5 V and if we use the PCT format the value is of the real type within the range 0 105 After the supply switch on analog outputs are always set to the value of 0 80 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Analog output 10 5 V 10V 5V Binary value OV o 2 oo 2 eu FSO mi co co D PCTO Fig 2 40 Range of analog outputs of modules CP 1005 CP 1015 Table 2 50 Transferred values of analog outputs for the range 0 up to10 V Output Variable value FS ENG PCT 10 55 V gt 31500 L5 5 V 31800 ap BM 5 L9 L 108 range range exceeding Em nominal range 0 V 2 5 INTEGRATED DISPLAY OF MODULES CP 1014 CP 1015 Basic modules CP 1014 and CP 1015 contain an integrated LCD display of the size of 4 x 20 characters and 6 user buttons Under the name OI 1073 the processor operating this display and buttons presents itself on the system bus The display is equipped with backlit which is active for 60 minutes since the user
70. undertaken while in operation The worker undertaking the maintenance must be at least trained and have appropriate electro technical qualification Correct input and output connection check The tightness of screws and the flawlessness of the conductor insulations are checked Cable connection is checked as well Voltage for supplying inputs and outputs check A voltmeter is used to check the power supply voltage for input and output units Correct values and thresholds are stated in the documentations of the used units Grounding terminals interconnection check The resistance between a random part of the metal PLC frame and the main grounding terminal of the case in which the PLC is located in is measured using a precise measuring device for small resistances The measured resistance must always be smaller than 0 1 O Cleaning the PLC If units are full of dust it is necessary to take them out of the rack and clean them using the air or with a brush This must be done very carefully to avoid the switching of any of the switches or the unit damage After mounting the PLC back on it is recommended to check the connection of the cables be careful not to interchange them Recommended measuring devices 1 a voltmeter for altering currents measuring precision class 1 5 or better 2 a voltmeter for direct currents measuring precision class 1 or better 3 a meter for small resistances OMEGA III or a similar type The floating batter
71. up RAM the option is enabled useful in such cases when the tables are modified by the user program By default the entire user program is backed up option disabled First warning time of the release of the warning that the maximum permissible cycle time could be exceeded If the cycle time of the user program processing is longer than the period of time defined by this constant PLC system services set the bit 52 7 as a flag that the time set was exceeded during the program processing at this cycle At the same time the code of the soft error is set in the system register S34 By default the value is 150 ms 181 TXV 004 10 02 5 PLC operation e Cycle error time of monitoring of the maximum permissible cycle time If the user program processing cycle is longer than the maximum permissible period of cycle time the PLC reports the critical error of cycle time exceeding blocks outputs and interrupts the cyclic execution of the user program This constant defines the longest permissible period of time during which the controlled object can stay without any intervention The default value is 250 ms the recommended maximum value is 500 ms e Backed up registers number of backed up registers R remnant zone Setting of the number of backed up registers R values of which will be saved during PLC power failure protected by the check character and restored in case of warm restart of the PLC The registers are saved in order beginning w
72. up to 4 simple one way counters or 2 simple two way counters IRC or 1 counter IRC including reset and capturing Modes of impulse length measuring and period and phase shift measuring are designated for periodic signals only These measurements are loaded by a live error arising due to occupance of the periphery processor during the data transmission with the central unit This error is eliminated so that the resultant value of the measuring is gained as an average of the last eight pulses captured Thus it is supposed that the detected signal is presented by impulses repeated with a certain periodicity An absolute error of the measurement is max 10 us and decrease in connection to the PLC cycle time extension The meanings of each function are described in the chapter 2 3 6 Counter inputs are connected similarly to standard inputs as shown in the fig 3 1 2 In fig 3 1 3 and fig 3 1 4 you can see examples of the IRC position sensors connection IRC1 IRC2 V Q V G TCL2 COM1 DIGITAL INPUTS Fig 3 1 3 Example of two IRC incremental encoders connection 95 TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules IB 1301 module IRC V GNI AR 24V U J e Li measurement el point input e a a DIGITAL INPUTS Q o 3 Q o amp s o o N E E TC LINE 24
73. value Binary value FS V Engineering value ENG Normalised value PCT Filtering mode m Enable ignore module error Fig 3 4 6 Analog inputs configuration jw Channel All Voltage range 0 10V Passing of value Binary value FS iw Engineering value ENG Normalised value PCT Filtering mode E jw Channel Al3 Curent range 4 20 m Passing of value Binary value FS v Engineering value ENG Normalised value PCT Filtering mode E X Cancel Help If we check an item Enable ignoring module error at the bottom side of T 1601 Module settings pane CPU doesn t stop user program performing even when the fatal error of data exchange with this module occurs but it tries to reinitialize the module and renew the communication The actual module status and the validity of data can be found in peripheral system status zone chap 6 5 This function can be used in case we want to keep PLC running even if peripheral module power supply is switched off There are shown transferred values for individual ranges of analog inputs in the following graphs and tables 133 TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules IT 1602 module Analog input 1 05 2 1 5 25 10 5 V 1 2 5 10 V 05 1 25 5V Binary value Y 0 0 0 OV o 9 Sg 2 2r RS E Co co S D PCT Fig 3 4 7 Voltage ranges of analog inputs of the IT 1601 module Tab
74. 0 ant 5 108 range range exceeding 20 mA 0000 30000 0000 nominal range 0 mA 0000 Table 3 4 13 Transferred values of analog inputs for the range 0 to 5 mA Measured Variable value STAT FS ENG PCT gt 5 25mA 000C 31500 ELS mA 0004 8 500 a 25 5 0004 195 range range exceeding 0000 E 0000 nominal range 0000 135 TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules IT 1602 module Analog input OmA 50 15000 100 30000 105 31500 T CoD PCT 94 25 7500 Fig 3 4 9 Current range 4 to 20 mA of analog inputs of the IT 1601 module Table 3 4 14 Transferred values of analog inputs for the range 4 to 20 mA Measured Variable value STAT FS ENG PCT 000C 31500 re E overflowing 20 8 mA 0004 31500 LEE 0004 si a 106 range range exceeding 20 mA 0000 30000 0000 nominal range 0000 0002 0003 136 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Prtooo M11000 thermistor input 400 200 125T i 378 4188 4117 50 155 70 442 50 68 48 32 50 90 60 40 0 FS 5 1500 0 PCT 94 50 15000 100 30000 105 31500 Fig 3 4 10 Analog inputs range of the IT 1601 module for resistance sensors Pt100 Pt1000 Ni1000 and NTC thermistors Table 3 4 15 Transferred values of analog inputs for Pt100 and Pt1000 Measured Var
75. 0 cycles N A external RC unit varistor diode DC 3750 V AC 3 50 V AC Binary input contact relays are brought out to connectors in the DIGITAL OUTPUTS field A schematic overview of the connections of loads powered by independent sources is shown in fig 2 1 4 Protection against overload and short circuit is ensured by usage of safety fuses for each input or for each group separately The rated voltage and type of the fuse is selected for each load and character of load differently while considering the maximum voltage and overload ability of the outputs or group of outputs For example when using tube fuses with a T and F fuse characteristic and a switching rate of 35 A it is possible to use a rated current of 3 A per fuse per output and fuses up to 10A when protecting a joint group conductor The principle of various ways how to undertake inductive load treatment RC draft support for anti interference members overview of anti interference items delivered by the PLC producers and other recommendations are stated in the Manual for designing of programmable logic controllers TECOMAT FOXTROT TXV 004 11 02 35 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT basic modules CP 10x4 module IR 1055 IR 1057 peripheries CH2 OPTIONAL SUBMODULE e g RS 232 RS 485 a Q Q x x o B2 p TI a Doin ns E z m BE 2 OO H H 04 4 gt gt o 7 fa DIGITAL OUTPUTS COM1 poo p poe
76. 0000 invalid protection character CRC of the entire new user program at RAM An error occurred during the new user program entry to the central unit It is necessary to repeat the process 70 09 0000 program is compiled for another series of central units The compiler was set for a different series of central units it is necessary to select the correct series of the central unit in the compiler menu and compile the user program again If the compiler was set correctly this compiler is designated for a higher version of system software than the version in the central unit of your PLC is This must be cleared either by using an older compiler version or by replacing the system software in the central unit 206 TXV 004 10 02 70 OB 0000 70 24 0000 70 25 0000 70 31 rr pp 70 34r r pp 70 43rr pp 7051rrpp 70 64rrpp 70 Al rrpp 70 A2rrpp 70 A3 rrpp TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers EEPROM programming failed An error of the new user program entry to EEPROM of the central unit occurred list of on line changes missing list of on line changes has invalid CRC An error of the new user program entry to EEPROM of the central unit occurred It is necessary to repeat the process initialization table missing The initialization table necessary for the operation of all peripheral modules is missing in the user program It is necessary to verify the correctness of configuration setup of the particular serial channel
77. 04 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers 1 input DIn 0 data transfer g tc 7 to CPU transferred data bit DI n 1 1 1 bit DIP n 1 0 1 Fig 2 19 Detection of short impulses into log 0 function t pulse width te PLC cycle period 1 input DIn d 0 tp data transfer i to CPU transferred data bit DI n 0 0 0 bit DIP n 0 1 0 Fig 2 20 Detection of short impulses into log 1 function tp pulse width t PLC cycle period Binary outputs The binary outputs state is contained in the DO variable The configuration of binary outputs can be found in the folder Binary IO Fig 2 18 By ticking the option Switch on of transfer of binary inputs we can enable the transfer of current states of all six inputs into the PLC notepad If this option is not ticked the relevant values are not transferred and the outputs are not set Analog inputs CP 1004 CP 1014 modules contain 4 analog inputs AIO to AI3 that have fixed measuring range from 0 to 10 V Each input has 4 variables STAT FS ENG and PCT The STAT status is transferred always among variables FS ENG and PCT we choose one depending on the interpretation of measured values we require The configuration of analog inputs can be found in the folder Analog inputs Fig 2 21 47 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT basic modules CP 10x4 module IR 1055 IR 1057 peripheries Module settings IR 1057 Binary 10 counter mode Analog inputs Iw Channel
78. 05 Display CP 1014 CP 1015 RUN mode 8 RUN flashing RUN flashing RUN flashing RUN flashing DO RUN mode signal fixing active analyzer runs F P Run RUN flashing 176 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Table 5 3 Indication of operating mode of central units Central unit state Display LED indication CP 1004 CP 1005 lay CP 1014 CP 1015 x xX XxX xX XX x RUN and ERR on error GOlBSCU LOC 3 O0 PLC switch off proceeded power failure RUN on undefined state 5 4 4 Change of PLC operation modes The change of PLC modes can be undertaken using the superior system master computer that is connected to the serial channel or the Ethernet interface Typically a standard PC represents this superior system serving as a programming device or as a monitoring or visualization workplace for the operation of the object controlled When changing PLC operating modes some activities are executed standardly and some are optional Generally the change of a PLC operating mode is an activity requiring a higher concentration of the operator since in many cases it significantly influences the state of the object controlled An example can be the change from the RUN to the HALT mode when the PLC stops the user program execution and the object connected is not controlled anymore Therefore we recommend reading the following text very carefully 177 TXV 004 10 02 5 PLC operation 5 4 2 S
79. 08 range range exceeding x 3000 a 1749 nominal range 0000 g 321 0000 0002 250 0002 1500 range descended range descended 0003 BEILTEEUERCTOESNUERE NEN TI YUYTITT US EN Analog outputs The IT 1601 module contains 2 analog outputs AOO and AO1 which have a range of 0 to 10V Each output has three variables FS ENG and PCT Among these variables we choose one according to what type of interpretation of the input value is required The configuration of analog outputs can be found in the folder Analog outputs fig 3 4 22 The transferred value in the FS variable is an int type variable The value 0 corresponds to the minimum value of the input unipolar value and the value 31 500 corresponds to the maximum value It applies that 10096 of the nominal range of the analog input corresponds to the value of FS 30000 The transferred value in the ENG variable is a real type variable and represents directly the value of output voltage in volts The transferred value in the PCT variable is a real type variable and represents the percentage relation between nominal and measured value of the analog input The PCT variable is related to the FS variable It applies that for the value FS 0 is the PCT 0 and for the value FS 30000 the PCT 100 The PCT variable can reach a maximum value of 105 which corresponds to FS 31500 Outputs behaviour in the HALT mode can be defined by two alter
80. 10 input DI2 11 input DI3 58 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Period and phase shift measuring The counter object enables measuring of a period on any of the four DIO DI3 inputs or of a phase shift between the inputs DII and DIO This mode can be set in the first counter object only The second object must be switched off The period length between two increasing edges of a chosen input signal or the phase shift value between two increasing edges of a chosen input signal DII and DIO are measured within the VALA variable The validity of the measured values is indicated by the EV tag in the status word Measured values are stated in microseconds they are represented by an average value of the last eight measurings by IR 1055 board It is possible to activate the measuring EN bit to switch between the measuring of period or phase shift MOD bit and to choose the measured input for period measuring INO and N1 SCNT counter status word 0 0 0 0 0 0 EV 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 EV 1 valid measured value tag CCNT counter control word 0 0 0 0 0 0 EN wi 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IN1 INO 0 MOD 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 EN 0O measuring deactivated 1 measuring activated MOD 0 period measuring 1 phase shift measuring IN1 INO selection of measured input for the period measuring
81. 1004 v1 7 Testy CP 1004 v1 4 Boot CP1004 v1 9 CP 1004 v2 4 216 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers System SW runs Run BOOT Y N If we press the key N the Firmupic exe program will be terminated and no changes to the firmware will be done Hereby versions of all firmware parts of the central unit can be detected By pressing the key Y we initiate the process of the firmware re loading Then we must answer the following query Program with verification Y N If we press the key N the firmware programming will be undertaken without an additional verification of programmed blocks The time needed for programming will be shorter than in case of pressing the key Y when apart from the positive acknowledgement after the programming of each block the block will be loaded from the PLC back to the PC and compared with the file programmed The programming progress will be displayed as follows Identification string 100 BOOT C 1 9 Upgrade of FW processor initiated 11 32 39 File programming in progress tecol004 tfw File version in Flash v2 4 Programmed file version v2 5 Approx file size 442 8 KB 342 8 KB programmed After the programming is finished the following report will appear Upgrade of FW processor finished 11 34 18 The new firmware is programmed in the system After the termination of the FirmUp1C program the firmware will be run Press any key
82. 10_p3_Alo STAT OVR 2322 OVF BOOL dk 10_p3_AlO STAT OVF 2323 FLS BDOL d i0 p3 AIO STAT FLS 204324 CJC BODL dk i0 p3 AIO STAT CJC 2x325 CHC BDOL d 10_p3_AlO STAT CHC 20330 FS INT Bg i p3 Al FS 2004 24 ENG REAL ap 0 p3 AIO ENG RESE PCT REAL a 0_p3_Al0 PCT ZXF40 TAI dy 0 p3 AI 20444 4 12 TAI d 0 p3 AI2 355 12 TAI dk 10 p3 Al3 304687 12 TAI dy 0 p3 Ald After compil TAI dk 0 p3 Al5 After compil TBIN_6DO 10 p3 DO BOOL m i0 p3 DO0 D00 22 0 BOOL E i0 p3 DO DO1 v2 1 BODL E i0 p3 D0 D02 V2 2 BDOL f i0 p3 D0 D03 23 BOOL 9 i0 p3 D0 D04 XY24 BOOL E i0 p3 D0 DO05 25 EA00 TAO_TCE 10 p3 ADU After compil FS INT E i0 p3 ADD FS After compil ENG REAL E i0 p3 amp DO ENG After compil PCT REAL E 10_p3_A00 PCT After compil AO TADO TC6 E 0 p3 A01 After compil Fig 2 30 IR 1056 board data structure 70 TXV 004 10 02 Input data DI bit TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers binary input values 8x boolean type 0 o D5 D4 DI3 D2 Df DIO i 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DIO DI5 binary inputs If the individual input is used for the analog measurement then the correspondent DI bit has a permanent value of 0 AIO Al1 Al2 AI3 Al4 AI5 analog inputs objects AIO Al5 TAI structure Aln STAT Aln FS Aln ENG Aln PCT bit bit Output data DO bit status word of
83. 2 18 Connection of the terminal board of the serial channel CH2 while submodule PX 7811 is fitted IN2 input IN2 IN3 input IN3 IN7 input IN7 Note The input IN5 is not brought out due to technical purposes Table 2 19 Connection of the terminal board of the serial channel CH2 while submodule PX 7812 is fitted INO input INO IN3 input IN3 Note The output OUT1 is not brought out due to technical purposes Binary inputs Binary inputs are used for connection of two condition signals of the controlled object to the PLC The PX 7811 submodule contains 7 binary inputs the PX 7812 submodule contains 4 binary inputs Inputs are galvanically separated from internal PLC circuits and are organized into a group with a common connector The common connector of the group is minus 25 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT basic modules Table 2 20 Basic parameters of binary inputs of submodules PX 7811 and PX 7812 Number of inputs Number of inputs in the group Galvanic separation from internal circuits yes Common conductor minus Input supply for log 0 UL max 45 V DC min 15 V DC for log 1 UH min 11 V DC type 24 V DC max 30 V DC Input current at log 1 typ 3 mA log 0 to log 1 delay 5 ms log 1 to log 0 delay 5 ms External supply voltage of input circuits 24 V DC Max power take off from external source 27 mA Insulation voltage between inputs and internal 500 V DC circuits Submodule power loss max 850 mW Binary outputs
84. 2 5W Connection fixed screw terminals max 2 5 mm conductor per terminal Galvanic isolation of supply from internal circuits none Number of inputs 4 Number of outputs 8 Size 53 x 95 x 65 mm 110 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers The connection of terminals of the IR 1501 module is shown in the table 3 3 2 Table 3 3 2 Connection of terminal boards A and B of the IR 1501 module A2 A3 A4 AS A6 A7 A8 A9 B1 3 3 1 1 Binary inputs Binary inputs serve for the connection of two condition signals of the controlled object to the PLC The IR 1501 peripheral module contains 4 binary inputs DIO DI3 Inputs have galvanic isolation from internal circuits of the PLC The input excitation switching is signalized by lighting up of the LED diode Inputs are organized into a group with a joint terminal The joint terminal can be plus or minus for each group Inputs can be used as inputs for counters too Even if these inputs are used for alternative functions as described they can still be used as binary inputs Inputs enable to switch the function of short impulses capturing on This function extends the selected level of the input signal until the next PLC turn is undertaken Consequently it is ensured that individual pulses on the input which are shorter than the PLC cycle will not be lost Note If the function of capturing short impulses is activated on one of the inputs it is forbidden to have the counte
85. 2 DI3 One one way counter UP UP Twoone waycouners UP UPB UP UPB Two way counter UP DOWN UP DOMWN Counter with controlled direcion CLK DIR CLK DIR CL MENSAE Eos Basic IRC ess tr sen V Two way counter with reset and U DOWN CLR CAP caine j OP PONN An om n fetal Rl RE pe RN RN with reset and capturing IRC with reset and capturing a operation DIO DI3 Period and phase shift measuring period both functions switcheable during Input optional during the ie operation operation DIO DI3 Phase shift Measured between DI1 and DIO Abbreviations of various signals overview UP impulse input for counter incrementation UPB impulse input for B counter incrementation 94 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers DOWN impulse input for counter decrementation CLK impulse input for counter DIR counter direction CLR counter reset CAP capturing of the counter value V first track IRC G second track IRC NI clearing pulse IRC MD measuring contact As can be seen in the table 3 1 5 both counter objects can be adjusted to different mode combinations providing that the first object uses only inputs DIO and DI1 first 5 modes If the first object uses all DIO to DI3 inputs then the second object is switched off According to the configuration we can have available
86. 3 2 1 0 DOO DO5 relay outputs 71 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT CP 101x module display Ol 1073 AOO AO1 analog output objects AOO AO1 TAO TC6 structure AOn FS Aln analog input value int type The minimum input value matches the value 0 the maximum value matches 31500 by which it is valid that 10096 of the nominal range of the analog input matches the value FS 30000 AOn ENG Aln analog input value real type Value of measured voltage in volts AOn PCT Aln analog input value real type The percentage relation between the measured and the nominal value of the analog input For the value FS 0 applies the value of PCT 0 and for the value FS 30000 the value PCT 100 The behaviour of each data object is described in the chapter below 2 4 6 Initialization and behaviour of individual data objects of the IR 1056 board The peripheral part of modules part IR 1055 board contains a block of binary inputs and outputs two counter objects and an analog inputs block The panel for setting of parameters of the IR 1056 board can be opened from the project manager HW Configuration HW Fig 2 31 In the folder Central module on the line I O we click on the B Project manager PLC Address 0 Connection type Not connected Common settings 2 Autogenerate config file Configuration can t be changed Suppress 10 modules Hw Select type of PLC series Hw Configuration Foxtrot PLC Network logica
87. 501 irxtiv 1 address wo EET IE 3 218 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers After parameters are set we press the button FLASH If the PLC was in the RUN mode then in switches to the HALT mode and discontinue all communications on the bus which results in for example freezing of system information on the in built display of basic modules CP 1014 and CP 1015 If the required module is found a window will appear with the description of the current firmware version that we intend to program We press the button Yes and thus initiate the process of firmware programming The process is displayed by a blue array in the bottom part of the window When it is finished the notice will appear informing on firmware entry which we confirm using the button OK Afterwards the Flasher is ready for further use We can change parameters and re load other firmware versions of other module or close the Flasher Discontinued communication on the PLC bus will be restored automatically after approx ten seconds from the programming termination The Flasher program can be also run from the branch according to the following example flasher exe TFW IR1055 tfw IP 192 168 33 150 PORT 61682 RACK 0 POS 3 AUTOMAT TFW file name tfw IP IP address of the central unit of the PLC PORT port always 61682 RACK group POS address AUTOMAT the program use as a console applicatio
88. 8400 0 tecol004 tfw V C Load the new firmware via Ethernet to CP 1014 with the address 192 168 33 160 after the communication establishment display actual firmware versions in the processor program dialogues will be in Czech Firmuplc exe E 192 168 33 160 0 tecol014 tfw V C The procedure of a new firmware version upload 1 Switch the PLC power supply on and wait till it switches to the RUN or ERR mode 2 Connect the communication cable serial communication cable or Ethernet cable 3 The current communication parameters setting can be detected by the button stroke on the front panel of the central unit 4 Terminate all other communications with the central unit before running the Firmupic exe program esp communication with the Mosaic If we did not do so the Firmupic exe program will notify that it is not possible to establish contact with the central unit Communication can be terminated for example by disconnection of all other communication cables from the central unit 5 Run the Firmupic exe program on the PC with corresponding parameters or the prepared batch In the window that will open during the run there is information on the central unit connected and on the type of connection displayed Firmware Upgrade Utility for TECOMAT systems version 2 7 c 2002 2007 Teco a s System address 192 168 33 160 Communication pc channel Ethernet 10M Identification string 100 CP1004K V2 4 Current version FW Switch
89. AB 24218 12 Al T I l rl p3 Al 48230 12 EjA00 T O TC6 ri p3 A00 FS INT S r1 p3 ADO FS ANAS ENG REAL E r1_p3_AQO ENG ZYF51 PCT REAL 9 r1 p3 ADO PCT ZYF55 HAOI TAO_TCE 8t r1 p3 A01 259 10 wv OK X Cancel Help Fig 3 4 4 IT 1601 module data structure Input data AIO Al1 Al2 AI3 Al4 AI5 Al6 AI7 analog outputs objects AIO AI7 TAI structure Aln STAT analog input Aln status word 16x boolean type Oo o O FLS OVF OVR UNR UNF 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 bit A L0 0 o j 0 o O O O it 45 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 130 TXV 004 10 02 Aln FS Aln ENG Aln PCT Output data AOO AO1 AOn FS AOn ENG AOn PCT TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers FLS 1 invalid value of the measurement during module initiation after the switch on OVF 1 range overflow input quantity exceeded the nominal range at 5 OVR 1 range exceeding input quantity exceeded the nominal range UNR 1 range nonfulfilment input quantity did not reach the nominal range UNF 1 range underflow input quantity did not reach the nominal range at 5 The signalization of range nonfulfilment and underflow is active for the range of 4 to 20 mA only and for resistance sensors of the temperature This function is not active for other voltage and current measuring ranges While setting any of the bits OVF and UNF to log 1 the red LED diode correspondent to the input given lights
90. AIO V Channel Al Passing of value Passing of value Binary value FS iw Binary value FS Engineering value ENG Engineering value ENG Normalised value PCT Normalised value PCT j Channel Al2 WV Channel Al3 Passing of value Passing of value Binary value FS Engineering value ENG Engineering value ENG iw Normalised value PCT Normalised value PCT Enable ignore module error DK x Cancel Help Fig 2 21 Configuration of analog inputs It applies generally that if we tick the box Channel Aln the corresponding input will behave as an analog Aln If the box Channel Aln is not ticked the corresponding input will behave as a binary DIn 4 The transferred value in the FS variable is an int type variable The value O corresponds to the minimum value of the input unipolar value and the value 31 500 corresponds to the maximum value Simultaneously it applies that 10096 of the nominal range of the analog input corresponds to FS 30000 The transferred value in the ENG variable is a real type variable and represents current in volts directly The transferred value in the PCT variable is a real type variable and represents the percentage relation between the measured and nominal values of the analog input The PCT variable is related to the FS variable It applies that the value FS 0 is the PCT 0 and for the value FS 30000 the PCT 100 The PCT variable can reach the maximum value of 105
91. B km Frequency length 820 nm Fiber type glass multimode 62 5 125 um Max number of I O modules for one 10 CPU Max length of one bus segment max 1 7 km Max total bus length according to segment number Peripheral modules addressing The addressing of peripheral modules is undertaken via a rotary switch on the module front panel Peripheral modules can be divided into three groups according to their addressing common peripheral modules IB 130x OS 140x IR 150x IT 160x ID 14 operator panels external masters of buses CIB MI2 02 These three groups are in terms of addressing independent on each other When addressing the rule applies that each module of one group must have a different address set If two or more modules of the same group with the same address are connected to the bus then transfer errors will occur and the system will not be functional Contrariwise the identical address of two modules each from a different group is not in the way Therefore we can operate e g modules IB 1301 and ID 14 on the address 8 both 4 3 2 Optical interconnection of peripheral modules Optical interconnection modules KB 0552 optical interconnection modules are intended for connection of optical cables to ST type optical connectors The module doesn t contain a termination of metallic line 159 TXV 004 10 02 4 Transportation storage and installation of PLCs resistance 120 Q therefore it may not be a
92. C 10 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Table1 5 System specification User program execution e Cyclic multi loop control with the possibility of interruption from time and error messages User program memory e CMOS RAM EEPROM Basic PLC modes e RUN user program execution e HALT termination of the user program execution PLC programming e Possibility to change the mode by the command through the serial channel Output locking e Byacommand through the serial channel e Automatically after a fatal system error Hardware diagnostics e Processor check watchdog e Power failure check data protection during power failure e Serial communication protection safeguard e Data transmission via I O bus safeguard Software diagnostics e User program validation check e User program cycle time watch e Continuous check of user program correctness non existing jump target memory structure overflow division by zero unknown instruction etc Communication e Serial through EPSNET MODBUS PROFIBUS DP CAN e General serial asynchronous e Interfaces Ethernet UDP TCP IP RS 232 RS 485 RS 422 Other functions Automatic recognition of peripheral unit configuration EEPROM programming for purposes of the user program backup Communication support of data monitoring by superior system Possibility of the user program execution without peripheral modules activation Additional memory for data archiving DataBox
93. C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 CO D D2 D3 D4 D5 D D7 D8 D9 Fig 2 10 Basic module CP 1004 In the table 2 23 is described the connection of terminals in terminal boards B and D The connection of the terminal board A is common for all basic modules and is described in the table 2 3 in the introduction to the chapter 2 The connection of the terminal board C is dependant on the submodule fitted and its options are described in the chapter 2 2 2 32 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Table 2 23 Connection of terminal boards B and D of CP 1004 CP 1014 modules B6 DI4 AIO binaryinputDI4 analoginput AIO O o y O B9 DI7 AI3 binaryinputDI7 analoginput AIS O D5 a a I a E D6 COM2 digit sense line of outputsDO3 DOS D8 DO4 relayouputDO4 1 1 1 1 D9 DO5 relayouputDOS 2 3 1 Binary inputs Binary inputs are instrumental to the connection of two condition signals of the controlled object to the PLC CP 1004 and CP 1014 basic modules contain 8 binary inputs DIO DI7 These inputs are not galvanically isolated from the internal circuits of the PLC The excitation switching on is signalized by lighting up of the relevant LED diode All inputs have a joint minus connector Inputs DIO DI3 can be used as inputs for counters inputs DI4 DI7 can be used as analog inputs AIO Al3 Even if these inputs are used as inputs for counters then still inputs DIO DI3 can be us
94. Configuration Enviormeni ENNIUS 7773 CIN TN 7 UN TXN 114 01 t EE PLC Network logical conr Documentation TXN 11301 TXN 116 01 SA Accessories Fig 3 1 6 Configuration of peripheral modules Binary inputs The binary input state is contained in the DI variable The state of all twelve inputs is valid even in cases when inputs are used for alternative functions short impulses capturing inputs for counters The binary inputs configuration can be found in the folder Binary IO Fig 3 1 7 By ticking the option Switch on the transfer of binary inputs DI8 to DI11 we can enable the transfer of current states of all four inputs into the PLC notepad If this options are not ticked relevant values are not transferred and do not appear in the PLC notepad 100 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Module settings IB 1301 Binary IO counter mode enable detect short impulses short impulses polarity short impulses detected DIO DIO short impulses detected into 1 short impulses detected DI1 DI1 short impulses detected into 1 short impulses detected DI2 Dl2 short impulses detected into 1 short impulses detected DI3 DI3 short impulses detected into 1 w Enable binary inputs carry from DIO to DI w Enable binary inputs carry from DIS to DI11 Enable ignore module error i i x Cancel Help Fig 3 1 7 Configuration of binary inputs If we check an item Enable ignoring module error at th
95. H2 falseMes After compil Control_ CH2 TCHControl r0 pO Control CH2 After compil CONTROL UINT p r pO Control CH2 CONTROL After compil a CH1 PC CH2 UPD Jf OK X Cancel Help Fig 2 9 Data structure of the PX 7812 submodule PX7812 IN outputs binary values 8times boolean type o o O O INS IN2 N1 INO 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 INO IN3 binary inputs input IN5 is not in the PLC FOXTROT physically interconnected bit PX7812 OUT outputs binary values 8times boolean type 0o 0 o o jOUT3 OU2 O OUTO 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OUTO OUT3 binary outputs output OUTI is not in the PLC FOXTROT physically interconnected bit Status and control structures of the channel Statistic CH2 and Control CH2 are not used in this mode 30 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers 2 2 3 Ethernet interface Basic modules are fitted with the Ethernet 10 100 Mbit interface The Ethernet interface is fitted with a RJ 45 connector with a standard signal arrangement The connector is ready to be used with common UTP patch cables The interface is designed to use direct or crossed cables Table 2 22 Ethernet interface connection front view of the connector on PLC Signal Conductor colour not used brown not used white brown RD or TD green or orange not used white blue not used blue RD or TD white green or white orange TD or RD orange or green TD or RD white orange or whi
96. I2 and DI3 Both counter objects can be set to a random mode from this group and each can work in a different mode The group of basic modes of counter objects consists of the following modes No counter One one way counter Two one way counters Two way counter Counter with controlled direction Basic IRC ff Oe Oo 9 102 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers The second group of basic modes of counter objects consists of the following modes Two way counter with reset and capturing Counter with controlled direction and with reset and capturing IRC with reset and capturing Impulse length measuring Period and phase shift measuring 9999 These modes use all four inputs DIO to DI3 and they can be set in the first counter object only The second counter object is always switched off The counters configuration can be found in the folder Counter mode Fig 3 1 10 Module settings IB 1301 Binary ID counter mode counter mode 1 counter mode 2 1x non reversible counter Y counter OFF Y input IN is active in O input NI is active in 1 input MD is active in 0 input MD is active in 1 Enable ignore module error DK x Cancel Help Fig 3 1 10 Counters configuration For counter modes from the second group it is possible to set the signal polarity NI and MD If we switch the option input NI is active in 1 on then the transfer of the signal from state 0 to state 1 will be understood as th
97. ICS Correct functioning of the supply modules of the FOXTROT system is the essential condition for error free PLC operation and for correct functioning of its diagnostics After switching the power supply on the central unit performs the basic check of the hardware see table 5 2 If a hardware error is reported we would recommend a specialized repair to be performed 6 2 ERROR INDICATION The central unit has an error stack containing 8 last errors reported by the diagnostics of the entire PLC The errors in the main error stack have the length of 4 bytes Error indication The content of the error stack can be read using the MOSAIC development environment The last critical error that stopped the PLC run is displayed on the seven segment display of central units CP 1004 CP 1005 in the following form E 80 09 0000 E J followed by an error code in hexadecimal form digits O to F 80 09 0000 error code On the display of central units CP 1014 CP 1015 the errors are displayed as follows 80 09 0000 Err Program dus compiled EFORT another Se rlilelis 192 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Concerning errors beginning with the number 9 the central units display the error code extended by two digits E 95 00 014212 95 00 014212 Err Maximum cy Lene time exceeded Errors in the error stack relate generally to PLC programming and the status of peripheral modules States of the central un
98. OMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Table 3 4 19 Transferred values of analog inputs for OV1000 Measured Variable value STAT ENG PCT 1050 Q e 31 200 2059 range range exceeding 1000 Q 30000 1000 nominal range 00 Analog outputs The IT 1601 module contains 2 analog outputs AOO and AO1 which have a range of 0 to 10V Each output has three variables FS ENG and PCT Among these variables we choose one according to what type of interpretation of the input value is required The configuration of analog outputs can be found in the folder Analog outputs fig 3 4 12 Module settings IT 1601 Analog inputs Analog outputs Channel A00 AO1 j Channel 400 j Channel 401 0 10V 0 10V Accept value Binary value FS C Engineering value ENG C Normalised value PCT Output during blocking Freeze C Defined status DOR value a Engineering value ENG C Normalised value PCT Output during blocking C Freeze Defined status Enable ignore module error OK x Cancel Help Fig 3 4 12 Analog outputs configuration The transferred value in the FS variable is an int type variable The value 0 corresponds to the minimum value of the input unipolar value and the value 31 500 corresponds to the 139 TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules IT 1602 module maximum value It applies that 100 of the nominal range of the analog input corresponds to the value of FS
99. OO 132 0 DOI BOOL m r_pi_po po1 2321 D02 BOOL 3 r1 p1 DO DO2 2322 DO3 BOOL S r1 p1 DO DO3 232 3 DO4 BOOL m r1 p1 DO DO4 2324 D05 BOOL 3 r1 p1 DO DO5 32 5 DOG BOOL S r1 p1 DO DO6 332 6 D07 BDOL E 1 p1 DO DO7 232 7 CNT OUT1 TCNTF_OUT rl_p1_CNT_OUT1 CCNT UINT SET UDINT ENT DUT2 TCNTF DUT E r1 pi CNT QUT1 CCNT r1 pi CNT OUTI SET 8 r1 pi CNT DUT2 Fig 3 3 6 IH 1501 module data structure 117 AZYwW34 4YL36 ZY40 6 J OK X Cancel Help TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules IR 1501 module Input data DI binary input values 8x boolean type bit ak 26 5 4 3 2 1 0 DIO DI3 binary inputs useable for counters DIP binary input values with short impulse detection 8x boolean type 0 j 0 o O0 DIP3 DIP2 DIPi DIPO bit yi 6 Hon 4 3 2 1 0 DIPO DIP3 input values DIO DIS with artificial extension of the selected level into one cycle detection of short impulses CNT_IN1 counter 1 input object TCNTF_IN structure CNT_IN1 SCNT counter 1 status word 16x boolean type oO o O EPS EMD EN EG EV bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 j 9 0 jJ EBSE 0 2 0c a0 EVES bit 215 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 EV 1 active edge tag on DIO EG 1 active edge tag on DI1 ENI 1 active edge tag on DI2 EMD 1 active edge tag on DI3 EPS 1 achieved preset tag EVB 1 active edge tag on DI1 B counter EPSB 1 achieved preset tag B c
100. P FMD 0 clear counter from the input CAP 1 capturing of the current value of the counter into the VALB variable from the CAP input Counter with controlled direction with clearing and capturing The counter object contains one two way counter of external events VALA variable equipped with a CLK input counter DIO input for assessment of the direction of counting DIR DI1 CLR clearing input DI2 CAP capturing input DI3 and a preset SET variable This mode can be set in the first counter object only The second object must be switched off If the entering edge appears on the CLK input then providing that the DIR input has the value of log 1 the counter increases its content by 1 and consequently if the DIR input has the value of log 0 the counter decreases its content by 1 In the status word in the EV bit the log 1 during one PLC cycle will show as an entering edge tag on the input If the resultant content of the counter is the same as the SET variable value then in the status word in the PS bit the log 1 during one PLC cycle will show as an achieved preset tag If the FC bit is set to log 1 in the control word the counter content will be cleared automatically If the entering edge appears on the CLR input up to the level which has been selected during the configuration as active the counter content will be cleared by a single application providing that the in control word is the NI bit set to log 1 The CAP input is m
101. PX 7811 optional on the submodule channel CH2 4 3 PX 781 Module dimensions 106 x 95 x 65 mm Galvanically separated are only relay outputs and serial channel CH2 depending on the submodule used realizing the interface All basic modules are supplied by 24V which is connected to the terminals A3 and A4 within the array marked 24V DC It is necessary to realize that internal and also peripheral circuits except relay inputs and channel CH2 are not galvanically separated ATTENTION The increased attention should be paid to connection of the power supply voltage If we connect 24 V onto different terminals than the supplying ones part of the system can be destroyed Within the TC LINE array there is on terminals A1 and A2 the system bus TCL2 outgoing section which serves for the connection of other peripheral modules chapter 3 The interconnection is undertaken so that using one line we interconnect terminals TCL2 13 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT basic modules of all modules and using a second line we interconnect terminals TCL2 Details are described in the chapter 4 3 1 Within the Foxtrot there is on terminals A5 and A6 the CIB outgoing section which is operated by the internal master that is within the basic module presented under the name MI2 01 Within the CH1 RS 232 array there is on terminals A7 A8 and A9 the serial channel CH1 outgoing section with fixed interface RS 232 chapter 2 2 1 Signal ground of the
102. R After compil OVR BOOL dl rl p4 AID STAT OVR After compil OVF BOOL dl rl p4 AID STAT QVF After compil FLS BOOL l _p4_AlO STAT FLS After compil CJC BOOL del rl p4 AIO STAT CJC After compil CHC BODL dl rl p4 AIO STAT CHC After compil FS INT dl rl p4 AID FS After compil ENG REAL aw ri_p4_AlO ENG After compil PCT REAL dl 1_p4_Al0 PCT After compil TAI dl rl p4 AH After compil T I dl rl p4 Al2 After compil dl rl p4 AI3 After compil TAI dl rl p4 Al4 After compil T I dl rl p4 Al5 After compil T I dl rl p4 AIB After compil TAI dl rl p4 Al After compil TAO_TC6 ri p4 ADO After compil SINT St ri_p4_Ago Fs After compil ENG REAL r1 p4 ADO ENG After compil PCT REAL 9t 11_p4_AQ0 PCT After compil AO1 TAO TC6 m rl p4 A01 After compil Jf OK X Cancel Help Fig 3 4 17 IT 1602 module data structure Input data AIO Al1 Al2 AI3 Al4 AI5 Al6 AI7 analog inputs objects AIO AI7 TAI structure Aln STAT Aln analog input status word 16x boolean type L 9 1 0 cyc FIS OVF OVR UNR UNF 7 A 2 1 DIG TTG GT 3 3 bit 13 CJC 1 non fusion end measuring error temperature measured by the thermocouple is not compensated it corresponds to the value measured at the temperature of the non fusion end 0 C FLS 1 invalid value of the measurement during module initiation after the sw
103. RTC circuit PLC variables analyzer support Possibility of fixation of peripheral module inputs and outputs Possibility to change the program during operation on line Project archivation in PLC memory MMC SD card with FAT12 FAT16 FAT32 file system Integrated web server 11 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT basic modules 2 PLC FOXTROT BASIC MODULES All basic modules of the FOXTROT system consist of several parts The first part constitutes of the central unit with the main system processor two serial channels Ethernet interface and TCL2 system bus for communication with peripheral modules The second part is composed of the processor ensuring the communication within the CIB bus It is presented under the name MI2 01 on the system bus The third part is peripheral and consists of the IR 1057 board CP 1004 CP 1014 or IR 1056 board CP 1005 CP 1015 Under this name the processor operating inputs and outputs is presented on the system bus an older type of IR 1057 is named IR 1055 Basic modules CP 1014 and CP 1015 contain yet another forth part which is the display and push buttons The processor that operates this part is presented on the system bus under the name OI 1073 Table 2 1 shows an overview of basic FOXTROT PLC modules including their configuration Table 2 2 shows the basic parameters connected with power supply and dimensions Table 2 1 Basic module options of the FOXTROT system Type Description Order number
104. S48 to S51 where the last error is saved pc instruction address where the error occurred program counter cc communication channel F2 system bus 02 cc 1200 address error 02 cc 15hh error of service byte hh 02 cc 16ss invalid parameters of communication service ss 02 cc 1809 protection error Data exchange via the system bus errors The reason is a high level of interference missing or non functional bus termination or a PLC fault These errors do not cause an immediate PLC suspension however their occurrence means a problem that could result in a critical bus error which then causes the PLC suspension 07 00 0000 remnant zone check error The backed up part of the notepad the so called remnant zone has an incorrect check sum The zone will be deleted and a cold restart will be performed The cause of this problem is RAM user memory backup fault on the central unit most likely on the backup battery 08 00 0000 exceeding of the first limit of cycle time monitoring The cycle period was longer than the preset value for warning 20 00 pcpc user program fault during continuous check found System internal error 205 TXV 004 10 02 6 Diagnostics and troubleshooting 6 4 2 User program errors According to requirements these errors can be treated within the user program either by eliminating the cause using the input parameters check before the execution of the particular instruction or by treating the consequence usin
105. T system Type Description Order number MI2 02 2 lines of the bus CIB TXN 131 28 chap 3 5 1 ID 14 display 4x20 characters 25 key buttons TXN 054 33 chap 3 5 2 All PLC FOXTROT modules are equipped with the plastic protection case and with a holder for the module mounting on to the U bar ATTENTION Modules contain components sensitive to electrostatic charge therefore user guides for these circuits must be abided The manipulation is undertaken on the module that is disconnected from the power supply only as well as on input and output signals 89 TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules IB 1301 module 3 1 BINARY INPUT MODULES These modules contain binary inputs and are connected to the basic module via the bus TCL2 3 1 4 IB 1301 module Peripheral module IB 1301 contains 12 binary inputs 24 V DC The first four inputs DIO DI3 can be used as a common binary inputs or as counters inputs All inputs are galvanically isolated The module is supplied from the supply voltage of z 24 V DC that is not galvanically isolated from internal circuits A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 AT A8 A9 A1 2 e888 8 amp amp amp 8 134 CORC ORC ORC ORC ORC ORC ORC NC B1 B2 B3 B4 BS B6 B7 B8 B9 Fig 3 1 1 Peripheral module IB 1301 Table 3 1 1 Basic parameters of the IB 1301 module Module type Supply voltage SELV 24 VDC 2595 1596 Internal protection none Max input power 2 5W Connection Fixed screw termi
106. Table 2 38 Basic parameters of analog outputs Module type Number of outputs 2 Number of outputs in the group 2 Output type active voltage output Galvanic isolation from internal circuits none Joint conductor minus External supply none Transmission period 10 us Protection type integrated surge guards Insulation potential under the normal service none conditions Digital display resolution 10 bits Input range resolution 1 LSB Max output value 105 96 upper limits of output range Max allowed permanent overload without 20 V each terminal AO against damage AGND Max output current 10 mA Analog output error max error at 25 2 of full range temperature coefficient 0 3 of full range K non linearity 0 7 of full range repeatability at steady state conditions 0 5 of full range Analog outputs are brought out to terminals in the array ANALOG OUTPUTS In the fig 2 29 there is a schematical drawing of the load connection to analog outputs 68 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Q SHINN MOM e Er oo e e adtjatjatjacdjatjiac DIGITAL ANALOG INPUTS L2 S lt o CI BUS o lt TC LINE 24 V CH1 RS 232 ANALOG OUTPUTS Fig 2 29 Typical example of the loads connection to analog outputs of basic modules CP 1005 CP 1015 2 4 5 Data provided by the IR 1056 board Central uni
107. UNI mode via the Ethernet interface there was set the number of the local port in the range 61680 61699 These values are reserved for the system use by in built protocols It is necessary to use a number out of this range unknown protocol of Ethernet interface In the UNI mode via the Ethernet interface there was the unknown protocol set UDP TCP etc It is necessary to set the correct protocol or to update the software version of the correspondent communication channel error connection In the UNI mode via the Ethernet interface there was an error index of the connection set It is necessary to check the maximum possible number of connections within the relevant communication channel This error occurs also when the number of connections was increased in the newer version of the firmware than the one loaded in this communication module The module firmware must be re loaded serial channel is not in required mode The serial channel is set to a different mode than the initialization is designated for The reason is generally that the serial channel does not allow the setting of the required mode and sets itself to the OFF mode thus it switches off Special submodules requiring special operation are identified by the central unit automatically and only such modes can then be set on the serial channel that are permitted for the relevant module On the contrary if this submodule is not identified then also it is not possible
108. UNon 3 Bus initialization when button is pressed continuously during RUN on steps 2 and 3 for about 3s a different action will take place in step 9 i SD MMC card comes LERNW 2 5 Initialization of the file system and Web server pou 6 System hw configuration detection waiting for set expansion elements readiness RUN on buses CIB OK transfer to next activity RUNon s J ER error is written to the error stack RUN last error and ERR E XX XX XXXX on 7 PLC initialization according to the user program OK transfer to next activity RUN on ER error is written to the error stack RUN last error and ERR E Xx XX XXXX on 167 TXV 004 10 02 5 PLC operation Table 5 1 Switching sequence of central units CP 1004 CP 1005 Pise s n win sp uo 07 system RUN on OK switching to RUN mode and start of the user RUN program flashing OK when button was pressed for about 3s in steps 2 or 3 switching to HALT mode user program is RUN on not started ER when an error occurred during switching RUN last error sequence and ERR E xx Xxx XXxx switching to HALT mode user program is not on started PLC operation after the power supply switch on Immediately after switching the power supply on the PLC performs activities shown in table 5 1 Further this state is called PLC switching sequence The purpose of the switching sequence is to test the PLC hardware and software and to
109. UT structure CNT_OUT1 CCNT counter control word1 16x boolean type L 0 FMD MD Ni FC SET RES EN bit CN WO 5 Los Foe T SETS TRESE TENE bit EN 0 counter 1 stopped 1 counter 1 counts RES 1 counter 1 reset and clearing SET 1 counter 1 set to the SET value FC 0 counter 1 runs free 1 clear counter 1 after the SET value is gained NI 1 approved signal capturing NI MD 1 approved signal capturing MD FMD 0 clear counter 1 from the MD signal 1 capture current value of counter 1 into VALB from MD signal ENB 0 counter 1B stopped 1 counter 1B counts RESB 1 counter 1B reset and clearing SETB 1 setting counter 1B to the SET value FCB 0O counter 1B runs free 1 clear counter 1B after the SET value is gained MOD 0 period measuring 1 phase shift measuring IN1 INO selection of measured input for impulse length or period measurements input DIO 01 input DH input DI2 11 input DI3 CNT_OUT1 SET counter 1 preset CNT OUT2 counter 2 output object TCNTF OUT structure CNT OUT2 CONT counter 2 control word 16x boolean type 119 TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules IR 1501 module 0 l o o o FG SET RES EN bit L3 13 13 DER SETE RESB bit EN 0 counter 2 n 1 counter 2 counts RES 1 counter 2 reset and clearing SET 1 counter2 set to the SET value FC 0 counter 2 runs free 1 clear counter 2 after the SET value is gained ENB 0
110. V DC Fig 3 1 4 Example of a complete connection of the IRC position sensor 3 1 1 3 Data provided by the IB 1301 module The IB 1301 peripheral module provides information on inputs Data structure can be seen in the panel O Settings in the Mosaic development environment Fig 3 1 5 icon Wa Structure items have assigned symbolic names which always start with r1 px where x is the number correspondent to the adjusted address on the rotating switch In the column Full entry the concrete symbolic name for the given item is always stated If we want to use data in the user program we use either this symbolic name or in the column Alias we enter our own symbolic name which can then be used In no case do we use absolute operands since they can alter after the new compilation of the user program 96 TXV 004 10 02 lt gt 1 0 setting IEC gt RM0 RM1 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers 0 IB 1391 1 IR 1501 2 os 1401 SDI DIO Dii DI2 DI3 DI4 BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL DIG DI DI8 DIS TBIN_12DI DMO BOOL DI11 BOOL EDIPW TBIN_4DIPW DIPO BOOL DIP1 BOOL DIP2 BODL DIP3 BOOL EICNT_IN1 TCNTF IN SCNT UIN T YALA UDINT VALB UDINT CCNT UIN SET UDIN ENT IN2 TCNTF IN CNT_OUT1 TCNTF QUT T T Data structure Fulnoetaion YfAlias Teminat Abs zen Value
111. ains a block of binary inputs and outputs two counter objects and an analog input block The panel for parameters setting of the IR 1055 respectively IR 1057 boards can be opened from the Project manager HW Configuration HW Fig 2 17 In the folder CPU on the line I O click on the X icon Project manager PLC Address 0 Connection type Not connected Common settings 2 Autogenerate config file Configuration can t be changed Suppress 10 modules F Hw Select type of PLC series Hw Configuration Foxtrot pei PLC Network logical connection i Sw CPU Extem 1 0 modules Extem CIB Displays Entre a PETS ES EES Documentation CPU Fel CP 1004 A IR 1055 1057 Fig 2 17 Configuration of the CP 1004 basic module Binary inputs Binary inputs state is contained in the DI variable The state of all universal inputs DIO DI3 is valid also in cases when inputs are used for alternative functions capturing of short impulses inputs for counters The status of universal inputs DI4 DI7 is valid only in such cases when inputs are not used as analog inputs 45 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT basic modules CP 10x4 module IR 1055 IR 1057 peripheries Module settings IR 105 Binary I0 counter mode Analog inputs enable detect short impulses short impulses polarity short impulses detected DIO short impulses detected DI1 DIT short impulses detected in
112. al module provides information on outputs Data structure is apparent from the panel O Settings in the Mosaic development environment Fig 3 2 3 icon a Items in the structure have assigned symbolic names which always start with rf px characters where x is the number correspondent to the set address on the rotary switcher In the column Full entry the concrete symbolical name for the given item is always stated If we want to use data in the user program we use either this symbolic name or in the column Alias we enter our own symbolic name which can then be used In no case do we use absolute operands since they can alter after the new compilation of the user program 107 TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules OS 1401 module VO setting IEC dS amp RM0 RM1 Data structure JF notation Alias Terminal Abs ien value Fined Note SDO TBIN 12DO rl p2 DO E n p2 D0 D00 M 11 p2 DO DO1 m r1 p2 D0 D02 m r1 p2 D0 D03 m 1 p2 D0 D04 M r1 p2 D0 D05 E r1 p2 D0 D06 m 11 p2 D0 D07 m r1 p2 D0 DO8 m r1 p2 D0 D09 m n p2 DO D010 m n p2 DO DO11 Jf OK X Cancel Help Fig 3 2 3 OS 1401 module data structure Output data DO binary output values 16x boolean type DO7 DO6 DOS DO4 DOS DO2 DO DOO bit i4 6 5 4 E 2 A 0 oO o j O j O0 DOM DOO DO9 DOS de At a 9 8 bit 15 14 13 DOO DO11 binary outputs The behaviour of individual data objects is described in
113. alue FS Binary value FS Binary value FS Engineering value ENG V Engineering value ENG V Engineering value ENG Normalised value PCT Normalised value PCT Normalised value PCT Filtering mode v Filtering mode Filtering mode Time constant 5 s v Channel AI3 Channel Ald Channel Als Voltage range 0 10V Voltage range 0 10 Y Voltage range 0 10 Passing of value Passing of value Passing of value Binary value FS s Ja Engineering value ENG IV Iz Normalised value PCT E El Ej pa Filtering mode NN D Enable ignore module error J OK X Cancel Help Fig 2 33 Configuration of analog inputs The transferred value in the FS variable is an int type variable The value 0 corresponds to the minimum value of the input unipolar value and the value 31 500 corresponds to the maximum value It applies that 100 of the nominal range of the analog input corresponds to the value of FS 30000 The transferred value in the ENG variable is a real type variable and represents the current in volts The transferred value in the PCT variable is a real type variable and represents the percentage relation between nominal and measured value of the analog input The PCT variable is related to the FS variable It applies that for the value FS 0 is the PCT 0 and for the value FS 30000 the PCT 100 The PCT variable can reach a maximum value of 105 which corresponds t
114. analog input Aln 16x boolean type oO o O FLS OVF OVR UNR UNF 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Ei o o o o o o o o 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 FLS 1 invalid measured value during module initialization after the switch on OVF 1 range reading input quantity exceeded the nominal range of 5 OVR 1 range exceeding input quantity exceeded the nominal range UNR 1 range descend input quantity descended under the nominal range UNF 1 range under flow input quantity descended under the nominal range of 5 Signalization of the underrange and under flow is active only for the range of 4 up to 20 mA for resistor sensors of temperature and thermocouples This function is not active for voltage and current measuring ranges While setting any of bits OVF and UNF into the log 1 the red LED diode relevant to the input given is lighting analog input value Aln int type The minimum input value matches the value 0 the maximum value matches 31500 by which it is valid that 10096 of the nominal range of the analog input matches the value FS 30000 Aln analog input value real type Value of measured voltage in volts The percentage relation between the measured and the nominal value of the analog input For the value FS 0 applies the value of PCT 0 and for the value FS 30000 the value PCT 100 binary output values 8x boolean type 0 0 DOS DO4 DOS DO2 DOt DOO oh 6 5 4
115. aracter F is displayed HALT mode The HALT mode is mainly used for activities connected with the user program editing At this mode neither the user program nor the data transmission between the central unit and peripheral units is executed The green RUN LED diodes on the central unit and peripheral modules are on permanently the ERR LED diodes are off On the seven segment display the letter H is on and in the left top corner the sign Halt is displayed PROG mode In the PROG mode CPU is during the user program saving into the back up EEPROM At this mode neither the user program nor the data transmission between the central unit and peripheral units is executed The green RUN LED diodes on the central unit and peripheral modules are on permanently the ERR LED diodes are off On the seven segment display the letter P is on and on the display in the left top corner the sign Prog is displayed Behaviour of the PLC during a critical error An exception from the above mentioned is a situation when a critical error occurs in the PLC that inhibits control activities In this case a mechanism for critical error treatment is activated that treats the critical error in light of control security and always switches the PLC to the HALT mode The green RUN LED diode stops flashing and the red ERR LED diode is on indicating an error state The code of the error that caused the PLC suspension is displayed on the seven segment display while besides t
116. at point 11 If you do not use the adapter proceed as specified at point 21 Only RxD is flashing Channel parameters of the central unit are set incorrectly mode speed address CTS detection RxD and TxD with RTS flashing alternatively Communication in the direction PC PLC is correct Proceed as specified at point 6 Another state Most likely a submodule for another interface is fitted or the cable is connected incorrectly For Ethernet Are the ETHERNET LED diodes on the central unit or the communication module on during communication No LED is flashing The error is in the cables including devices of hub or switch type Ethernet LED is on The Ethernet connection is correct IP address and IP mask settings of the central unit or PC can be incorrect It is valid generally that IP addresses of both participants must be identical in positions where the IP mask has non zero values The IP mask should be identical for both participants for example PC PLC IP address 192 168 1 1 IP address 192 168 1 2 IP mask 255 255 255 0 IP mask 255 255 255 0 Or PC PLC IP address 192 168 12 1 IP address 192 168 25 8 IP mask 255 255 0 0 IP mask 255 255 0 0 If the problem is still not solved carry on with point 4 4 Do you want to program the PLC using the MOSAIC development environment Yes Proceed as specified at point 5 No this is communication with visualization software etc If you use the adapter of the serial interfa
117. ay Ol 1073 Table 2 34 Basic parameters of analog inputs Module type Number of inputs Number of inputs in group Galvanic isolation from internal circuits Diagnostics Joint conductor External supply Converter type Digital display resolution Protection type Insulation potential under the normal service conditions Filtration Internal calibration Measuring range resolution 1 LSB voltage compliance current range passive thermal sensor resistance transmitters From IR 1056 board firmware version 1 4 CP 1005 CP 1015 IR 1056 6 variant function of inputs DIO DI5 6 none overload signalization in status word minus none approximation 14 bits integrated surge guards none low pass filter digital comb filter 50 60 Hz auto calibration always after module switch on O0 up to 10 V 1 4975 mV 0 up to 5 V 748 75 uV 0 up to 2 V 299 5 uV 0 up to 1 V 149 75 uV 0 up to 0 5 V 74 875 uV 0 up to 20 mA 2 995 uA 4 up to 20 mA 2 995 uA Pt100 1 385 90 up to 400 Pt100 1 391 90 up to 400 C Pt1000 1 385 90 up to 400 C Pt1000 1 391 90 up to 400 C Ni1000 1 617 60 up to 200 Ni1000 1 500 60 up to 200 NTC termistor 12 kQ 25 C 40 up to 4125 C OV1000 0 up to 1000 Q zl m Pt100 yu 1 A Pttooo ee Ni1000 pO NTC o a CH1 RS 232 lt ANALOG OUTPUTS
118. c controllers with a number of modular enhancements They unify the advantages of compact automatic controllers in size and the advantages of modules in expandability and variability They are intended for technology control within various industry fields and other branches Individual system modules are sealed in plastic protective cases which are installed onto the CSN EN 50022 U bar Due to this it is possible to manipulate with devices without the threat of damage to the CMOS parts Communication Data communication among PLCs and superior PCs among several PLCs or among PLCs and other devices are usually realized via serial transmissions The FOXTROT systems support basic transmissions via the Ethernet network or the EPSNET industrial network One asynchronous serial channel is fitted with a RS 232 interface the second one is optionally fitted with various types of physical interfaces according to customer s specifications RS 232 RS 485 and RS 422 When using the RS 485 interface there can be up to 32 participants on one level of the EPSNET network with the serial line length of up to 1200 m Optionally other industrial protocols and buses can be supported such as MODBUS PROFIBUS DP CAN etc Eventually asynchronous communication 6 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers through universal transmission channels controlled directly from the user program is possible too All central units are standardly equipp
119. ccordance with the international standard IEC 61131 The language description can be found in the manual Programming of TECOMAT systems in accordance to IEC 61131 3 order number TXV 003 21 02 191 TXV 004 10 02 6 Diagnostics and troubleshooting 6 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING The diagnostic system of the FOXTROT PLC is a part of standard software and hardware of the PLC and its main task is to ensure a trouble free and precisely defined function of the PLC in any situation In case of PLC failure the diagnostic system must primarily avoid the possibility of emergency states in the technology being connected to the PLC Further task of the diagnostic system is to facilitate the clearing of faults arisen to maintenance workers or users The diagnostic system is active from switching of the PLC power supply on and works independently from the user Generally it is possible to say that the diagnostic system continuously monitors all essential parts and functions of the PLC and at the moment of an error it ensures that the error state is treated and provides information on the fault Thus the control safety is ensured and quick corrective actions can be taken if a PLC fault occurs Another function of the diagnostic system is to inform the user on possible mishandling or wrong procedures undertaken while operating the PLC so that working with PLC becomes easier and more efficient 6 1 CONDITIONS FOR THE CORRECT OPERATION OF THE PLC DIAGNOST
120. ce proceed as specified at point 11 If you do not use the adapter of the serial interface proceed as specified at point 21 5 Is the Mosaic development environment or any other software using PLC system services already connected through any interface No If you use the serial interface adapter proceed as specified at point 11 212 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers If you do not use the adapter of the serial interface proceed as specified at point 21 Yes PLC system services cannot be used through more interfaces at the same time Terminate the communication of all other software using system services wait 5 seconds and retry to establish the required communication Serial interface adapter check 11 Are channel LED diodes flashing on the adapter of the serial interface RS 232 RS 485 during communication The adapter is not equipped with indication Consider all possibilities mentioned below No LED is flashing a Adapter power supply does not work or the adapter is defective b The PC or cable between the PC and adapter is defective Proceed as specified at point 21 Only TxD is flashing RTS lighting permanently or not at all The fault is either within the RTS signal between the PC and the adapter or the PC software does not support the RTS signal control necessary for the RS 485 interface not necessary for RS 232 If the PC software does not support the RTS signal the adapter must be set to
121. common conductor DO1 protection U element inductive module output load terminal board Fig 4 3 Parallel connection of the protection element to the load Table 4 6 Interference elimination sets Interference elimination set For load of Set order number content 8x varistor 24 V 24V DC AC TXF 680 00 8x varistor 230 V 230 VAC TXF 680 03 8x RC unit R 10Q C 0 47uF 24 48 V DC AC TXF 680 04 8x RC unit R 470 C 2 0 1uF 115 230 VAC TXF 680 05 Table 4 7 Parameters of varistors used in interference elimination sets Energy that can be captured by the varistor I t t is time of duration of the extinction pulse in ms Current through the varistor Average value of output power loss P Further information on interference elimination can be found in the Manual for designing of TECOMAT FOXTROT PLCs TXV 004 11 02 4 5 POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS Detailed information on requirements and realization of power supplies can be found in the Manual for designing of TECOMAT FOXTROT PLCs TXV 004 11 02 4 5 1 PLC power supply The PLC power supply must be in the overvoltage category II in accordance with the CSN 66 0420 1 If a computer Ethernet RS 485 interface etc is connected to the PLC or if it is required that the PLC circuits besides relay inputs are in compliance with safety separated circuits SELV then the power supply must fulfill the SELV requirements in accordance with the CSN 33 2000 4 41 Between the primary
122. common conductor of outputs DOO DO2 DOO relay output DOO B6 B9 D6 D8 D9 2 4 4 Binary inputs Binary inputs serve for the connection of two condition signals of the controlled object to the PLC Basic modules CP 1005 CP 1015 contain 6 binary inputs DIO DI5 Inputs are not galvanically isolated from internal circuits of the PLC The excitation switching is signalized by lighting up of the LED diode All inputs have a joint minus terminal Inputs can be used also as analog inputs AIO Al5 If the individual input is not used for the analog measurement then it works as a binary input Attention Inputs used as binary inputs must not have any jumpers inserted within the set array in the bottom of the basic module CP 1005 see chapter 2 4 3 Table 2 31 Basic parameters of binary inputs Number of inputs 6 Number of inputs in the group 6 Galvanic isolation from internal circuits ne Diagnostics signalization of the excited input on the panel Joint conductor minus Input voltage for log 0 UL max 5 V DC for log 1 UH min 12 V DC typ 24 V DC max 30 V DC Input current at log 1 type 5 mA Delay from log 0 to log 1 1 ms Delay from log 1 to log 0 1 ms Binary inputs are bring out on terminal in the array DIGITAL ANALOG INPUTS In the fig 2 25 there is a schematical drawing of the connection of the switchers 61 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT CP 101x module display Ol 1073
123. cribed in table 5 3 At any of these operating modes except PROG it is possible to find out the setting of the Ethernet and serial channels CH1 and CH2 on the display of the central unit If in basic modules CP 1004 and CP 1005 we press and hold the button MODE parameters of Ethernet ETH1 channel are displayed then of the CH1 and at last of the CH2 This information is displayed repeatedly for the duration when the button is pressed The displaying of the parameters has no effect on the system operation In basic module CP 1014 and CP 1015 these data can be displayed on the display if they are in the system mode for displaying it means that the PLC mode and inputs and outputs state is displayed Then using the cursor keys we list through screens informing about the setting of channels and other parameters as it is shown on following examples number and viewed information can differ from following examples according to PLC type and actual firmware version 1 Ethernet ETH1 channel parameters active communication modes IP IP address IM IP mask GW local network gateway IP address 2 3 Serial channel CH1 and CH2 parameters active communication mode A channel address S transmission rate kBd T response delay ms P transmission delay in 100 ms B maximum gap between two received characters in ms TR idle time between received messages in bytes TT idle time between transmitte
124. ct enables the connection of an incremental position sensor with outputs with open collectors VALA variable Both tracks V DIO or DI2 and G DI1 or DI3 only can be connected The clearing impulse is not connected The preset SET variable is also available If the resultant content of the counter is the same as the SET variable value then in the status word in the PS bit the log 1 during one PLC cycle will show as an achieved preset tag If the FC bit is set to log 1 in the control word the counter content will be automatically cleared The control word can also control the counter run EN bit reset the counter RES bit or set its content to a SET variable value SET bit SCNT counter status word 0 0 0 PS 0 0 EG EV 7 6 5 4 is 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 EV 1 entering edge tag on input UP EG 1 entering edge tag on input DOWN PS 1 achieved preset tag CCNT counter control word 0 0 0 0 FG SET RES EN 7 6 ES 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 EN 0 counter stopped 1 counter counts RES 1 counter resetting and clearing SET 1 setting counter to the SET variable value FC 0 counter free run 1 clearing the counter after variable SET value is gained 54 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Two way counter with clearing and capturing The counter object co
125. ctivate the function of capturing short impulses for the according input If the option short impulses detected into 1 of the correspondent inputs is ticked then the function of short impulses capturing into log 1 is activated otherwise the function of short impulses capturing into log 0 is activated If one of the options is not available it means that the relevant input is already occupied by a counter function If we have the input signal which is mainly in the state of log 1 and impulses onto log 0 occur within that are shorter then the longest possible PLC cycle period then a loss of such impulses can occur because only such states of inputs are standardly transferred into the PLC that occur at the time of one cycle turn of the central unit If we switch the detection of short impulses for the log 0 on then its changes are detected on the correspondent input If the value log 0 appears on the input during the cycle scan then it will stay saved in the module memory until the nearest data transfer to the central unit even though the value log 1 is on the input at the time of the data transfer The same applies by analogy for the input signal which is mainly in log 0 and short impulses onto log 1 appear on him We switch the detection of short impulses for the log 1 on and the short term value of log 1 on the input is prolonged until the cycle scan The input state with short impulse detection switched on is contained in D P variable 46 TXV 0
126. d messages in bytes CTS CTS signal detection RTS RTS signal mode MT token mode transferred data format in the form a b c where a is number of data bits 8 or 7 b is parity bit type E even parity D odd parity N no parity O O parity 1 1 parity c is stop bit number usually 1 serial channel interface on CH1 fixed RS 232 on CH2 submodule type 1 PEG 0 S 38 4 Ww 3L S off B 0 8 E 1 eleirnif a ce RESAS 232 173 TXV 004 10 02 5 PLC operation CH 2 fe ae he no aLa e GC be Se L S 4 Additional memory user program back up EEPROM activation off on size of DataBox memory size of memory card and size of free space on the card EEPROM ag he DATABOX By fl ae tet memory cuadra 512MB be ae SS memory 355MB 5 Information about user program name and version of the user program date of compilation size of user code and percentual occupation of user program memory size of user tables and percentual occupation of memory for tables PROGRAM 1 0 2009 01 07 Boot CEDEISSOIUIMIA Switch 1014 System www Detailed information on serial communications can be found in the manual Serial communication of TECOMAT PLCs 32 bit model TXV 004 03 02 If the display is in the user mode of displaying it displays characters defined by the user program we will switch it to the system mode by short stroke of the button MODE While displaying in
127. d of events process protocols diagnostic reports of type black box Table instructions above the variable space allow the index variables operation the realization of delay lines long shift registers conversions into the code 1 of n variable selection step sequencers event records and various stack structures Table instructions with structured access Sequential controller instructions e The system contains 8 user stacks and instructions for their switching useful for passing of more parameters between functions that do not follow immediately one after each other immediate state of the stack saving etc A useful tool is the set of system variables where the system time system time units and their edges communication variables flag and command variables and system messages are realized 999 999 190 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers e For reduction of the response time and to facilitate the programming so called multiprogramming multi loop control including interruption processes is used Arithmetic instructions with floating point with single precision as well as double precision PID controller instructions Operator panel operation instructions The full description of the instruction file is stated in the manual nstruction set for TECOMAT PLC 32 bit model order number TXV 004 01 02 The system can also be programmed in ST IL LD and FBD languages in a
128. data about configuration hw module configuration error invalid configuration data Configuration of the peripheral module hardware failed The repair by a specialist is necessary to be done the module did not reply to communication service ss The peripheral module did not respond to the communication service within the specified period of time The reason is a high level of interference missing or non functional bus termination or a PLC fault initialization not finished Running initialization of the peripheral module was not finished the bus did not react to the communication service ss bus is not free after communication service ss module responded to the communication service ss using invalid data The peripheral module did not respond to the communication service within the specified period of time The reason is a high level of interference missing or non functional bus termination or a PLC fault data exchange unknown mode The peripheral module requires an operation mode that is not supported by the central unit It is necessary to update the central unit firmware communication with the central unit interrupted Peripheral modules are equipped with a check timer monitoring that monitors the bus in the RUN mode The central unit sets the timer to a period of time a little longer than the maximum permitted PLC cycle time is If there is no communication with any of the network participants detected on the serial line durin
129. de The group of basic modes of counter objects consists of the following modes 122 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers No counter One one way counter Two one way counters Two way counter Counter with controlled direction Basic IRC The second group of basic modes of counter objects consists of the following modes fet o Oe 9 Two way counter with reset and capturing Counter with controlled direction and with reset and capturing IRC with reset and capturing Impulse length measurement Period and phase shift measuring 9999 These modes use all four inputs DIO to DI3 and they can be set in the first counter object only The second counter object is always switched off The counters configuration can be found in the folder Counter mode Fig 3 3 11 Module settings IR 1501 counter mode 1 counter mode 2 1x non reversible counter 2x non reversible counter input IN is active in O input NI is active in 1 input MD is active in 0 input MD is active in 1 Enable ignore module error DK x Cancel Help Fig 3 3 11 Counters configuration For counter modes from the second group it is possible to set the signal polarity NI and MD If we switch the option input NI is active in 1 on then the transfer of the signal from state 0 to state 1 will be understood as the entering edge If we switch the option input NI is active in 0 on then the transfer of the signal from state 1 to state 0 wi
130. de EG 1 active edge tag on DI3 according to the mode EPS 1 achieved preset tag EVB 1 active edge tag on DI3 B counter EPSB 1 achieved preset tag B counter VALA counter value 2 udint type VALB counter value 2B pair of counters udint type 98 TXV 004 10 02 Output data CNT_OUT1 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers counter 1 output object TCNTF_OUT structure CNT_OUT1 CCNT counter 1 control word 16x boolean type bit bit L 0 FMD MD Ni FC SET RES EN CN N o T HOR FOE see TRES T EE EN 0 counter 1 2 1 counter 1 counts RES 1 counter 1 reset and clearing SET 1 counter 1 set to the SET value FC 0 counter 1 runs free 1 clear counter 1 after the SET value is gained NI 1 approved signal capturing NI MD 1 approved signal capturing MD FMD 0 clear counter 1 from MD signal 1 capture current value of counter 1 into VALB from MD signal ENB 0O counter 1B stopped 1 counter 1B counts RESB 1 counter 1B reset and clearing SETB 1 set counter 1B to the SET value FCB 0 counter 1B runs free 1 clear counter 1B after the SET value is gained MOD 0 period measuring 1 phase shift measuring IN1 INO selection of measured input for impulse length or period measurements input DIO 01 input DI1 input DI2 11 input DI3 CNT_OUT1 SET counter 1 preset CNT OUT2 counter 2 outputs object TCNTF_OUT structure CNT OUT2 CONT cou
131. display project file are too long error in the graphical display project file small space in the stack for graphical display communication driver small space in the stack for synchronization of file with display graphical display project is empty it does not contain any file invalid folder of graphical display project It is necessary to check up the correctness of the corresponding graphical display configuration setting eventually to check the memory card functionality 200 TXV 004 10 02 Ar pp 3700 Ar pp 3701 Ar pp 3803 Ar pp 3805 Ar pp 3806 Ar pp 3807 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers invalid length of received initialization table in the module invalid length of declared initialization table in the module The initialization table is either broken or designated for another type of module or another version of module It is necessary to verify the correctness of configuration setup of the particular serial channel undertake a new compilation and load the repaired user program into the PLC again incorrect number of participants of the CIB network The maximum allowed number of participants of the CIB network was exceeded incorrect number of communication channel Attempt to initialize the communication channel which is not available within this module Check the correctness of communication channel configuration invalid mode of communication channel Attempt to initialize the communication channel
132. ductive load max 3 A at 30 V DC AC15 for inductive load max 3 A at 230 V AC Switching frequency without load max 300 switches min Switching frequency with rated load max 20 switches min Mechanical lifetime min 5 000 000 cycles Electrical lifetime at max load for resistant load min 100 000 cycles DC13 for inductive load min 100 000 cycles AC15 for inductive load min 100 000 cycles Short circuit protection none Treatment of inductive load external RC input varistor diode DC Insulation voltage between inputs and internal circuits 3750 V AC between output groups 3750 V AC 63 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT CP 101x module display Ol 1073 CH2 OPTIONAL SUBMODULE e g RS 232 RS 485 1 a a Q x x o B2 p TI a Doin ns E z m BE 2 OO H H 04 4 gt gt o 7 fa DIGITAL OUTPUTS COM1 poo p poe N f UN 4j Ue Rz R z F e e o o Fig 2 26 Typical example of the loads connection to relay outputs of basic modules CP 1005 CP 1015 The principle of different ways of the inductive load treatment instruments of RC suppression elements proposal an overview of sets of suppression elements supplied by the PLC producer and other recommendations are stated in the documentation The handbook for programmable automatons TECOMAT FOXTROT TXV 004 11 01 desi
133. e summarized we can achieve bus length that is several kilometers long The optical cable ensures the galvanic isolation and thus to the module or group of modules that is connected via the optical cable must be an independent power supply connected Detailed description of calculation of the maximum cable lengths can be found in chapter 4 3 2 Attention The metallic communication bus between modules must not be led through an outside environment or between separately standing buildings regardless the environment 158 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers After a near lightning bolt stroke a direct threat caused by an electromagnetic field or a significant difference of potentials of the individual buildings can occur In both cases the destruction of all parts connected to the bus can occur In such cases an optical interconnection must always be used regardless the bus length The overall characteristics of the FOXTROT modules interconnection types to assemblies are stated in the table 4 1 The stated possibilities can be mutually combined Table 4 1 Possibilities of FOXTROT modules interconnection Versions Additional hw KB 0552 Transfer medium Metallic cable Metallic cable Optical cable 2x twisted pair Twisted pair GND 2x twisted pair Power supply distribution no no Bus galvanic isolation no yes Cable used Standard ST ST patch cable Connector 2x ST Attenuation approx 3 5 d
134. e Mosaic environment fig 2 8 fig 2 9 icon M Structure items have assigned symbolic names that always begin with characters rO pO which are assigned to the central unit In the column Full entry is always presented a particular symbolic name of the item given If we want to use data in the user program we either use this symbolic name or in the column Alias we enter our own symbolic name which can be used further In no case do we use absolute operands since they can alter after a new compilation of the program 1 0 setting ER IEC J5 do 35 DEC EXP HEX BIN STR jb amp NoConm RM0 MIZ wrz o1m 3 mr 1057 IR 1057 a 7 7 NNUS 7 UN 75 Ro 7 7 WU mPX7811 IN TPX7811 IN LKruBuc s p PX7811 IN After compil ae INO BOOL gp i0 pO PX7811 IN INO After compil IN1 B00L P4 r pO PX7811 IN INT After compil IN2 BOOL Pa r p PX7811 IN IN2 After compil IN3 BOOL p 10_p0_PX7811_IN IN3 After compil IN4 BODL Pg ri pO PX7811 IN IN4 After compil IN5 BDOL p 10_p0_PX7811_IN IN5 After compil ING BOOL Pu 1i p P7811 IN7INB After compil IN BOOL P4 r pO PX7811 IN IN After compil E Statistic_CH2 TCHStatistic 10 pO Statistic CH2 After compil STAT USINT l r pO Statistic CH27STAT After compil ERR USINT l 10_pO_Statistic_CH2 ERR After compil trueMes UDINT l 10_pO_Statistic_CH2 trueMes After compil falseMes UDINT l 10_p0_Statistic_CH2 falseMes After compil
135. e bottom side of B 1301 Module settings pane CPU doesn t stop user program performing even when the fatal error of data exchange with this module occurs but it tries to reinitialize the module and renew the communication The actual module status and the validity of data can be found in peripheral system status zone chap 6 5 This function can be used in case we want to keep PLC running even if peripheral module power supply is switched off It is possible to activate the function of short impulses capturing on each input DIO to DI3 individually By ticking the option short impulses are detected we can activate the function of short impulses capturing for the correspondent input If the option short impulses detected into 1 of the according inputs is checked then the function of capturing short impulses into log 1 is activated otherwise the function of capturing short impulses into log O is activated If one of the options is not available it means that the appropriate input is already occupied by a counter function If we have an input signal which is mainly in the log 1 state and impulses into log 0 occur on it that are shorter then the longest possible PLC cycle period then a loss of such impulses can occur because only states of inputs appearing at the time of the central unit cycle turn are standardly transferred into the PLC If we switch on the detection of short impulses for the log 0 state then its changes are detected on the relevant
136. e entering edge If we switch the option input NI is active in 0 on then the transfer of the signal from state 1 to state 0 will be understood as the entering edge The same applies for the MD signal The counter object modes are identical to those of IR 1055 board of CP 1004 module and are described in detail in chapter 2 3 6 103 TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules OS 1401 module 3 2 BINARY OUTPUT MODULES These modules contain binary outputs and are connected to the basic module via the TCL2 bus 3 2 1 OS 1401 module The peripheral OS 1401 module contains 12 binary 24 V DC outputs All inputs have galvanic isolation The module is powered by 24 V DC which has no galvanic isolation from the internal circuits OS 1401 Flg 3 2 1 OS 1401 peripheral module Table 3 2 1 OS 1401 basic module parameters Power supply voltage SELV 24 VDC 2595 1596 Internal protection Maximum input Connection Fixed screw terminals max 2 5 mm conductor per terminal Galvanic isolation of power supply from internal none circuit Number of inputs 12 Size 53 x 95 x 65 mm 104 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers The connection of terminals of the OS 1401 module is shown in the table 3 2 2 Table 3 2 2 Connection of terminal boards A and B of the OS 1401 module DO11 binary output DO11 3 2 1 1 Binary outputs Binary outputs serve for controlling two condition action and signaling elements of
137. e program cycle avoid the possibility of occurance of hazardous states within the control algorithm while being solved during the computation input variables cannot be changed management writing Y reading X user program solution Fig 1 1 Cycle of the user program solution Read X transcription of values from PLC input modules into the X area in the notepad memory Write Y transcription of values computed by the program from the Y area into PLC output modules Management preparation of the PLC central unit for the next cycle program solution 5 TXV 004 10 02 1 Introduction to the TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers input module output module address 2 address 3 PLC scratchpad memory signal DO2 eS output element inputs image X lalale lalalalala RUN BLK ri p3 DO DO2 RUN BLK CR outputs image Y ossa eeeecocc08 eeeccoc0c HETEHBIBHHIEE EEE EEE signal DI5 input 9 contact user program rl p2 DI DI5 rl p3 DO DO2 m C program written in ladder diagram LD PO LD rl p2 DI DI5 program written in WR rl p3 DO DO2 mnemonic code IL EO Fig 1 2 Signal processing scheme of the PLC symbolical signal names are automatically generated in the Mosaic environment and the user has the opportunity to change them 1 2 TECOMAT FOXTROT SYSTEM FEATURES The TECOMAT FOXTROT PLOs are small and compact automati
138. e termination output TxRx1 data received and sent level CAN1 line Bo MM MEE TxRx2 data received and sent level CAN2 line TxRx2 data received and sent level CAN line inati inati C7 Only one line termination is brought out for one CAN line any one of the two If we need to terminate both lines at this place then we terminate the second line using a 120 Q resistor between signals TxRx and TxRx of this line 2 2 2 5 PLC FOXTROT connection to the PROFIBUS DP network The MR 0152 submodule enables the connection of the PLC FOXTROT to the PROFIBUS DP network as a slave station with a transmission rate of up to 12 MBd It can only be used in the DPS mode It is necessary to terminate communication lines on both ends to ensure correct functioning It is undertaken by the connection of terminals TxRx with BT and TxRx with BT Furthermore it is important to remember that the line A of the PROFIBUS bus has TxRx level and the B line TxRx level 23 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT basic modules Table 2 16 Connection of the terminal board of the serial channel CH2 while submodule MR 0152 is fitted 5V supply output 5V GND signal ground BT RS 485 line termination output BT RS 485 line termination output TxRx data received and sent level TxRx data received and sent level TxRx data received and sent level 2 2 2 6 The connection of heat meters via the M Bus
139. ect operation of the PLC diagnostics 192 6 2 BIOMINGICANOM soonest onem eie ene bre orales E Ee a GARA eds E tute Lia 192 6 97 EataleltOIS c ea o nipui desc become di ti ea eee eee 193 6 3 1 User program and central unit hardware errors seeeusussss 193 6 3 2 Communication channel operation errors eessssseses 196 6 3 3 Peripheral system errors i i ite oer Eee rr Ene Pear t reta E anna eO cea 199 b 3 4 SVSIOITLOITOIS corii e eR ERR nM uen 205 6 4 Oter erora S tine sans ee D epo ade ond ed antico n E Ea 205 D SVSIOITO T DIS occa i Cot uua tub cut ne pn a eU Lo ULL CL CUAL Ure EU 205 6 4 2 User program EEG a oo aude et asi eite ab a aite eis eie An 206 6 4 3 Errors during the on line change seeeeesecccceeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeeeeeeeeeeestseeeees 206 6 5 Peripheral system status ZOFIO oer o e Rn p EUER EE n RR a rR LER RE RR 210 6 6 Communication with the master system troubleshooting 211 Te PLC MAINTENANCE oiississssssssssceinsisssessacanseceniasvannionsveansacnceanicestaiasaansonsaenndeesseansannwe 214 Yzp SEMMWare change ocior i cerea reat tere otn e ad 214 7 1 1 Central unit firmware change s edo opa tti eire 215 7 1 2 Other processors firmware change ssssssssseeeennee 217 APPENDIX qup sa Sisson casita cht chase aaraa Seaway os hag da dad ca ka bad oa wana Up ape Aaa eased 220 Overview of errors saved to t
140. ected to the last module along with the termination unit KB 0290 one piece is included with the basic module D L V Foxtrot ETHERNET Oo CP 1004 88 8888 NJ TCL2 bus RI ADR IR 1504 1 o UN BLK 34e 7 8 9 ADR IR 1501 adr 0 adr 1 Fig 1 3 1 4 basic module bus termination 11 0504 adr 9 peripheral modules PLC TECOMAT FOXTROT set BASIC PLC PARAMETERS TECOMAT FOXTROT PLOs are designed to be fitted into cases and racks The basic parameters of the PLCs can be seen in tables 1 1 to 1 5 Detailed parameters of each module are stated in the relevant chapters All FOXTROT PLC modules are equipped with a plastic cover and a holder for the installation on U rail Dimensions of a basic module are shown on Fig 1 4 Peripheral modules has the same shape their width is half size only The width of each module is a multiple of 17 5 mm marked as M This value corresponds with the size of circuit breakers and other electrical installation elements mounted on U rail Then the size of basic modules is equal to 6M and the peripheral modules to 3M TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers 105 0 Fig 1 4 Basic module dimensions Table1 1 Basic parameters Product standard CSN EN 61131 2 2005 idt IEC 61131 2 2003 E
141. ection of analog signals of the controlled object to the PLC The IT 1602 peripheral module contains 8 analog inputs AIO AI7 Inputs are independently configurable as voltage inputs for low values or as inputs for connection of thermocouples with external cold junction All inputs are bipolar All inputs have one joint terminal and are galvanically isolated from internal circuits Moreover each input is equipped with a red LED diode indication the state when the signal value on the input is outside the measuring range overloading or unloading of the input Cold junction temperature measuring is realized via a special input CJC using an external sensor Ni1000 1 617 142 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Table 3 4 23 Basic parameters of analog inputs of the IT 1602 module Module type Number of inputs Number of inputs in group Galvanic isolation from internal circuits Diagnostics External supply Converter type Digital display resolution Protection type Insulation potentials at conditions Filtration normal operation Internal calibration Measuring range resolution 1 LSB voltage ranges thermocouples IT 1602 8 8 yes signalization of the out of range value in the status word and by LED diode on the front panel none sigma delta 16 bits integrated surge guards 500 V DC between input and internal circuits low pass filter digital comb filter50 60 Hz autocalibration always a
142. ed as binary inputs simultaneously Inputs DI4 DI7 works as binary only when they are not used for analog measuring apply to each input independently on others Table 2 24 Basic parameters of binary inputs Number of inputs 8 Number of inputs in group 8 Galvanic isolation from internal circuits no Diagnostics Signalization of excited input on panel Common conductor minus Input voltage for log 0 UL max 5 V DC min 5 V DC for log 1 UH min 15 V DC type 24 V DC max 30 V DC Input current at log 1 type 5 mA log 0 to log 1 delay 5 us DIO DI3 5 ms DIA DI7 log 1 to log 0 delay 5 us DIO DI3 5 ms DIA DI7 Minimum width of the pulse captured 50 us 33 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT basic modules CP 10x4 module IR 1055 IR 1057 peripheries Inputs DIO DI3 allow to switch on the function of short impulses capturing This function prolongs the selected level of the input signal until the PLC cycle scan Therefore it is possible to ensure that individual pulses on the input which are shorter than the PLC cycle will not be lost Note If the function of capturing short impulses is activated on one of the inputs it is then forbidden to have switched on the counter which uses this input If such a situation should occur the function of capturing short impulses is switched off automatically Binary inputs are bring out onto connectors within fields DIGITAL SPECIAL INPUTS and DIGITAL ANALOG INPUTS You can see
143. ed direction and with capturing and resetting IRC with capturing and resetting Impulse length measuring Period and phase shift measuring 9999 These modes use all four inputs DIO to DI3 and they can be set only in the first counter object The second counter object is always switched off Counters configuration can be found in the folder Counter mode Fig 2 23 Module settings IR 1057 Binary ID counter mode Analog inputs counter mode 1 counter mode 2 1x non reversible counter 2x non reversible counter f input IN is active in 0 input NI is active in 1 input MD is active in 0 input MD is active in 1 J OK X Cancel Help Fig 2 23 Counters configuration For counter modes from the second group it is possible to set the signal polarity NI and MD If we switch the option input NI is active in 1 on then the transfer of the signal from state 0 to state 1 will be understood as the entering edge If we switch the option input NI 50 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers is active in 0 on then the transfer of the signal from state 1 to state 0 will be understood as the entering edge The same applies for the MD signal We will now describe functions of individual counter object modes One one way counter The counter object contains one one way counter of external events VALA variable equipped with the UP input counter DIO or DI2 rather and with a preset SET variable If the enterin
144. ed with a 10 100Mb Ethernet interface allowing operation of more logic connections at a time Creating an extensive system Peripheral expanding modules are connected to the central unit via serial bus Due to this individual parts of the TECOMAT FOXTROT system can be distributed so that individual modules are placed right by the technologies in operation and thus save the power cabling Connection with PC The entire system can communicate with computers of the PC standard The computer can be thus used for monitoring of the controlled process although it is located outside the industrial environment in a central control desk or a control centre The computer also serves as the programming tool for PLC Besides the TECOMAT FOXTROT PLC series computers of the PC standard can join the communication via a serial interface adapter as well as other units which fulfill EPSNET requirements another PLC TECOMAT operator panels etc Distributed control systems Based on these facts extensive systems of distributed or hierarchic control can be created However these systems can be also created by sequential bottom up steps which means that the originally autonomous systems are gradually connected and completed with the upper level of control or with central monitoring and data collection only Systems developed in this way usually have longer durability than the ones created in one top down step The advantage of these distributed sys
145. els settings are included in program and are prefered to ones in CPM EEPROM Channel rack Channel Communication Communication Answer pmmunicati CTS Token Transmisio structure position mode address speed delay delay Detection transfer with parity Channel mode CP 1004 0 0 L ICH CH1 Pe fo 38 400 10 off on TL ETH1 192 168 033 176 ETH PC ETH PLC off ETH uni off OU Backup program into EEPROM off x Cancel Help Fig 2 5 UPD mode selection in the channel CH2 The window Submodules selection will appear fig 2 6 fig 2 7 From the list we select the corresponding submodule and we name symbolically input and output data those names will appear in the panel Setting V V in the column Alias Then by pressing the button OK we confirm the selection and the setup is finished now Select submodules Select submodules PX 7811 v Input 1 Output Zone name In Ana i l wv OK X Cancel Help j Fig 2 6 PX 7811 submodule selection Select submodules Select submodules PX 7812 v Input Output Zone name In Zone name Dut J OK X Cancel Help Fig 2 7 PX 7812 submodule selection 28 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Data provided The channel CH2 in the UPD mode provides information on inputs and outputs on submodules PX 7811 and PX 7812 The data structure is visible in the panel Setting V V In th
146. er supply switch on If we press and hold the button MODE during the power supply switch on the menu of possible modes will appear on the display Using cursor keys we indicate by the cursor gt the required item and press the button J The system will call upon us to confirm the selection E g after the selection of the item HALT mode the following will appear you sueniescst HALIT mod press Ll to co press C to ca By another stroke of the button we confirm the selection and run the required action If we selected by a mistake a different item we press the button C that returns us back to the menu RUN mode run the user program RUN mode If we select this item PLC will continue in the switching sequence from the step 3 table 5 2 After the switching sequence termination the user program will be executed 171 TXV 004 10 02 HALT mode set par 5 PLC operation does not run the user program HALT mode If we select this item PLC will continue in the switching sequence from the step 3 table 5 2 After the switching sequence termination the user program will not be executed the PLC will stay in the HALT mode outputs will stay blocked and PLC will expect commands from the superior system The user program can be activated either via the development environment or by the power supply switch off and on This function is useful when trouble occurs with the already running user program central unit paramete
147. es 60 241 Binary INPUTS xo or Rc ERE i ee 61 24 2 BMelay oulpuls co E A EE a Ed peepee NE cup Ee cuin 62 231 3 Ahalo INDUNG x cosas comet eo tat t Um ah a Ra ERU EUR 64 2 4 4 Analog outputs ote ees cus cu ee cee ceu eMe case tus Mete is coe e ebd Aa acne dias 68 2 4 5 Data provided by the IR 1056 board eeesseeeesssseees 69 2 4 6 Initialization and behaviour of individual data objects of the IR 1056 board 72 2 5 Integrated display of modules CP 1014 CP 1015 sss 81 Zoe DISDlay FOLIIS itch scat oet boot e p dc ceci nd 82 2 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers 2 5 2 Keybuttons COCING sit to Soto oe oben p ee p aat ed 85 2 5 3 Data provided by the Ol 1073 display seeeeeseeseees 85 2 5 4 Initialization of the Ol 1073 display sects evens ao tr roro Ene ton ene ois 86 TECOMAT FOXTROT PLC PERIPHERAL MODULES 89 3 1 Binary inpattmmodal6S sek ce epit deinen iesedec quesos deque ania eaten M ERN ted 90 31 1 MBA SOU module is icd etit ette es cedro ra rm Eb coh bh ee aes 90 3 1 1 1 BINT VMS ois arco C ES 91 3 1 1 2 QS OULU Ss a a a Sl A A E AL Ot E 93 3 1 1 3 Data provided by the IB 1301 module sseesssesss 96 3 1 1 4 Initialization and behaviour of individual data objects of the IB 1301 module 100 3 2 Binary output modules atta ors ea on rU a pee ua s 104 3 2 1 9 T401 mod le chispa pc
148. es transferred between CPU and peripheral module is not created It is necessary to check up the correctness of the corresponding peripheral module configuration setting eventually to check the memory card functionality file with variables cannot be open The file with variables cannot be open It is necessary to check up the correctness of the corresponding peripheral module configuration setting eventually to check the memory card functionality error in variable list The list of variables is made wrong It is necessary to check up the correctness of the corresponding peripheral module configuration setting graphical display working zone is overcrowded The list of variables for graphical display is too big It is necessary to lower a number of variables number of screen got over declared maximum The list of variables is made wrong It is necessary to check up the correctness of the corresponding peripheral module configuration setting error at graphical display project opening graphical display project is not accessible error at graphical display project header reading error at graphical display project reading file stated in graphical display project does not exist information about file stated in graphical display project can not be found the length of file does not correspond to data in graphical display project time of file modification does not correspond to data in graphical display project names in the graphical
149. f basic modules CP 1004 produced in 2007 version hw 01 is not equipped with the holder for the floating battery 2 2 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES As it was mentioned above the central unit of all versions of basic modules PLC FOXTROT contains two serial channels chapter 2 2 1 and one Ethernet interface chapter 2 2 3 The serial channel CH1 has a fixed interface RS 232 serial channel CH2 enables the selection of the interface via exchangeable submodules MR 01xx chapter 2 2 2 2 2 4 Serial channels Serial channel CH1 Serial channel CH1 has fitted a fixed interface RS 232 Within this channel there can be set communication modes PC PLC MPC UNI MDB and PFB Connectors wiring is stated in the table 2 6 Table 2 6 Serial channel CH1 connection GND ground RxD received data RTS modem sending prompt It is necessary to bear in mind that this serial channel is not galvanically separated Serial channel CH2 Serial channel CH2 enables the selection of the interface via the exchangeable submodules MR 01xx chapter 2 2 2 Submodules are equipped with the identification record that can be read in the Mosaic development environment Thus the current mounting of the basic module can be detected If there is on the serial channel set a mode that the exchangeable submodule does not support table 2 7 the serial channel is switched off OFF mode 2 2 2 Exchangeable submodules Exchangeable submodules can be divided into t
150. f inductive load External RC unit varistor diode The circuit will become inactive loads will be switched and current will run through the protective circuit diode Binary outputs are brought out to terminals in the DIGITAL OUTPUTS array A schematic overview of the loads connection powered by independent sources is shown in fig 3 2 2 Outputs are realized by semiconductor switches with internal protection against current and heat overload To increase the resistivity and lifetime it is necessary to include anti interference elements to the switched load The 24V DC power supply connected to the VDO terminal and COM1 is necessary for the correct functioning of the output switches The principle of various ways how to undertake inductive load treatment support for RC anti interference members draft overview of anti interference sets delivered by the PLC producer and other recommendations are stated in the Manual for designing of programmable logic controllers TECOMAT FOXTROT TXV 004 11 02 106 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers RUN BLK 45 35 6 g 7 e 0 9 ADR OS 1401 DIGITAL OUTPUTS re D o o e a Fig 3 2 2 Typical example of loads connection to binary inputs of the OS 1401 module 3 2 1 2 Data provided by the OS 1401 module The OS 1401 peripher
151. f the function of the short impulses capturing is activated on one of the inputs it is forbidden to have the counter object which uses this input switched on If such a situation occurs the function of the short impulses capturing is automatically switched off 91 TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules IB 1301 module Table 3 1 3 Basic parameters of binary inputs of the IB 1301 module Number of inputs 12 Number of inputs in group 4 8 Galvanic isolation from internal circuits yes Diagnostics Signalization of the excited input on the panel Joint conductor minus plus Input voltage for log 0 UL max 5 V DC min 5 V DC for log 1 UH min 15 V DC type 24 V DC max 30 V DC Input current at log 1 type 10 mA DIO DI3 type5 mA DIA DI11 Delay from log 0 to log 1 5 us DIO DI3 5 ms DI4 DI11 Delay from log 1 to log 0 5 us DIO DI3 5 ms D14 DI11 Minimum width of captureable pulse 50 us Binary inputs are brought out to terminals within arrays DIGITAL INPUTS You can see a schematic overview of switchers connection in the fig 3 1 2 92 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers ADR 84301 DIGITAL INPUTS 24V U Fig 3 1 2 Typical example of switches connection to binary inputs of the IB 1301 module 3 1 1 2 Counters Binary inputs DIO DI3 can be used as counter inputs Two counter objects are available that can work
152. ferred values of analog inputs for the range 0 to 10 V Output Variable value FS ENG PCT 10 5 V 231500 LL EET overflowing oe m BENE S 108 range range exceeding 10 a EE nominal range 0 V 140 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers 3 4 2 Module IT 1602 The IT 1602 peripheral module contains 8 analog inputs and 2 analog outputs All inputs and outputs have galvanic isolation The module is powered by 24 V DC which has no galvanic isolation from internal circuits A1 A2 A3 A4 AS A6 AT A8 A9 CIC ORC ORC ORC ORC ORC ORC ORC t a EI Z 9 g 2 CLIN ANALOG OUTPUTS RUN BLK ADIR IT 1602 ANALOG INPUTS 8 ee 8 ee amp amp B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 Fig 3 4 14 The IT 1602 peripheral module Table 3 4 21 Basic parameters of the IT 1602 module Power supply voltage SELV 24 VDC 2595 1596 Internal protection none Maximum input 2 5W Connection fixed screw terminals max 2 5 mm conductor per terminal Galvanic isolation of supply from internal circuits none Number of analog inputs 8 Input for measuring of cold junction Number of analog outputs 2 Size 53 x 95 x 65 mm The terminals connection of the IT 1602 module is shown in the table 3 4 22 141 TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules IT 1602 module Table 3 4 22 Connection of terminal boards A and B of the IT 1602 module 3 4 2 1 Analog inputs Analog inputs are used for the conn
153. fter module switch on 1 to 1 V 39 06 uV 0 1 to 40 1 V 4 88 uV J C210 to 1200 K 200 to 1372 R 50 to 1768 S 50 to 1768 B 250 to 1820 All inputs have one joint terminal and are galvanically isolated from internal circuits Joint terminals of analog inputs analog outputs and non fusion end are interconnected Each input is equipped by a red LED diode indicating the state when the signal value on the input is outside the measuring range overloading or unloading of the input Analog inputs are brought out to terminals in the ANALOG INPUTS array The input for cold junction measuring CJC is brought out to terminals next to outputs There is a schematic drawing of the connection of various signal sources to analog inputs in fig 3 4 15 Thermocouples except B type ones require the connection of a passive sensor Ni 1000 1 617 for cold junction measuring Examples of sensors connection and requirements on wiring are described in the Manual for designing of programmable TXV 004 11 02 143 logic controllers TECOMAT FOXTROT TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules IT 1602 module CJC Ni1000 1 617 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 AT A8 A9 eeeeeee ea o O ANALOG OUTPUTS IT 1602 CIC ICICI IRIRI Bi B2 B 3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 V V tc J K R S B Fig 3 4 15 Typical example of signal connection to analog inputs of the IT 1602 module ind
154. g between system screens Codes of pressed buttons are not in the system mode transferred into the PLC notepad 2 5 3 Data provided by the OI 1073 display The display Ol 1073 enables the characters entry on the display and capturing of user keys Data structure can be found in the panel O Settings In the Mosaic environment fig 2 42 icon Wa 85 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT CP 101x module display Ol 1073 Stricture items have assigned symbolic names that for the Ol 1073 display start always with the characters rO p1 In the column Full entry there is always a concrete symbolic name shown for the item given If we want to use data in the user program we use either this symbolic name or in the column Alias we enter our own symbolic name that we can then use In no case do we use absolute operands since they can alter after a new compilation of the user program I0 setting IEC do ot o RMO 0 CP 1014 1 0I 1073 2 mI2 01n 3 IR 1057 Data structure i Terminal Abs len value s 011073 Keyb USINT j After compil 011073 VideoRam ARRAY 0 73 OF USINT O11073_VideoR am After compil Fig 2 42 Data structure of the Ol 1073 display Input data 011073 UserKeyb pressed button code usint type If no button is pressed the value transferred is 00 While the button is pressed its code chapter 2 5 2 table 2 56 is transferred by a single application in one cycle of the user program
155. g edge appears on the UP input the counter increases its content by 1 and in the status word in the EV bit the log 1 during one PLC cycle will show as an entering edge tag on input If the resultant content of the counter is the same as the SET variable value then in the status word in the PS bit the log 1 during one PLC cycle will show as an achieved preset tag If simultaneously the FC bit is set to log 1 in the control word the counter content will be automatically reset The control word can also control the counter run bit EN counter reset bit RES or set its content to a SET variable value SET bit entering edge SCNT counter status word 0 0 0 PS 0 0 EV of 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 EV 1 entering edge tag on the UP input PS 1 achieved preset tag CCNT counter control word 0 0 0 0 FC SET RES EN f 6 Es 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 EN 0 counter stopped 1 counter counts RES 1 counter reset and its clearing SET 1 setting counter to the SET variable value FC 0 counter free run 1 clearing the counter after the variable SET value is reached Two one way counters The counter object contains two one way counters of external events VALA and VALB variables equipped with UP DIO or DI2 and UPB DI1 or DIS input counters and a joint preset SET variable If the en
156. g registers S48 to S51 where the last error is saved 10 00 0000 division by zero In the instruction the divider was 0 13 00 0000 table instruction above the notepad exceeded its range The table defined by the table instruction above the notepad exceeded its range the instruction will not be executed 14 00 0000 source data block defined out of range The data source block for the transfer instruction was defined out of range of the notepad data or table The instruction will not be executed 15 00 0000 data destination block defined out of range The target source block for the transfer instruction was defined out of range of the notepad or table The instruction will not be executed 6 4 3 Errors during the on line change These errors are reported during the on line change of the user program If some of these errors occur the new user program is denied by the central unit and the technology is hereafter controlled without an interruption according to the original program The r character represents the occurrence zone 0 basic module 1 peripheral module 3 external CIB master bus the pp character represents the module address 0 to 9 The cc character represents the communication channel 01 to 10 CH1 to CH10 D1 USB E1 and E2 Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2 70 05 0000 invalid map length of the new user program 70 06 0000 invalid protection character CRC of the map of the new user program map at RAM 70 07
157. g this period of time communication is claimed interrupted and the peripheral module switches to the HALT mode independently 203 TXV 004 10 02 Ar pp 6001 Ar pp 6201 Ar pp 6202 Ar pp 6203 Ar pp 6204 Ar pp 6401 Ar pp 7005 Ar pp kkkk 6 Diagnostics and troubleshooting The reason is a high level of interference missing or non functional bus termination or a PLC fault peripheral module receives no data Peripheral modules are equipped with a check timer monitoring the frequency of data exchange with the central unit in the RUN mode If there is no data exchange between the peripheral module and the central unit within the cycle period the communication is claimed interrupted and the peripheral module switches to the HALT mode independently The reason is a high level of interference missing or non functional bus termination or a PLC fault data cannot be transmitted in the HALT mode The peripheral module which is in the HALT mode cannot perform data exchange with the central unit The reason why the module did not switch to the RUN mode as commanded by the central unit is that the initialization of peripheral modules failed or a high level of interference occurred or there is missing or non functional bus termination or a PLC fault occurred The failed initialization is usually reported by more specified error message non available bus service non available bus service hw module failure unknown bus service
158. ge and installation of PLCs basic module must be at one end of the bus and a terminating 120 O resistor must be placed on the other end between TCL2 and TCL2 signals For easy installation the terminator KB 0290 is included to the basic module This member contains a terminating resistor and is designed to be inserted into the TCL2 bus terminal During the assemblage we insert first the terminator into terminals then the conductor for interconnection of the bus and then tighten terminals The terminator can be ordered separately under the number TXN 102 90 Individual modules are interconnected via cables intended for the RS 485 bus If the bus length exceeds 10m we connect the TCL2 bus through the whole length without a power supply Because the bus in not galvanically isolated it is vital to interconnect the grounds of all sources that supply these modules to ensure the equilibration of potentials Modules can be interconnected via optical cables too or by a combination of optical and metallic cables For interconnection via the optical cable the converter KB 0552 chapter 4 3 2 must be used Modules are interconnected via standard ST ST patch cables The optical converter does not contain a metallic bus termination 120 Q resistor thus it does not need to be always at the end of the metallic line If it is at the end of the metallic line then the KB 0290 terminator must be used It results from the above mentioned that by using optical c
159. geable subimodules 5e o o ai e oa e SG D co ids 19 2 2 2 1 RS 232 az iyizie MORTE Te 21 2 2 2 2 RS 485 interface iria ER RR EEERERIR E EMERERAEERERE UTEMRERREEMREAEIMERERUEE RR UFETEE UP 21 2 2 2 3 19 422 IMT ACG ices onore Cx cumin sca e dam Kex Ga condim cac God nnd 22 2 2 2 4 PLC FOXTROT connection to the CAN bus eeeeeeeeeeeese 23 2 2 2 5 PLC FOXTROT connection to the PROFIBUS DP network 23 2 2 2 6 The connection of heat meters via the M Bus interface 24 2 2 2 7 Expansion of further binary inputs and outputs sssse 24 22 9 Ethernet Menace co adiga ai aa ea th De monui re Ei Eee Mot Lei pas 31 2 3 Peripheral part of modules CP 1004 CP 1014 ssseeeneee 32 EMEND 33 2 3 2 Relay OULD UTS cove coa ooa tte oua tipa tot euet tates la tel ou atus tel oue tutu Peta 34 2 3 3 Analog Inputs as 2 c th ctl ieee totu Cette Slot LL Ear 36 29 4 COUME S neii pe t erbe ant lon teo a Lento mtt ente Len LIA eie e on 37 2 3 5 Data provided by the IR 1055 IR 1057 boards sseseesssssssss 40 2 3 6 Initialization and behaviour of individual data objects of the IR 1055 IR 1057 loyers ra ati Aa Ab ius atc E CORE UE DETUR ERROR SOC UOREURPUN An Aa ana duane meena IMS 45 2 4 Peripheral part of modules CP 1005 CP 1015 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeee
160. gning 2 4 3 Analog inputs Analog inputs are used for the connection of analog signals of the controlled object to the PLC Basic modules CP 1005 CP 1015 contain 6 analog inputs AIO AI5 which are physically identical with DIO DI5 binary inputs Inputs have no galvanic isolation from PLC internal circuits All inputs have a joint minus terminal If the individual input is not used for the analog measurement it works as a binary input It is necessary to configure individual inputs by jumpers within the set array in bottoms of basic modules CP 1005 CP 1015 fig 2 27 According to use of individual inputs we set the correspondent jumpers in conformity with the table 2 33 ee gt PASSIVE Oi CURRENT e e gt e gt e co e rn e gt e e gt e o M Fig 2 27 Set array in the bottom of the module CP 1005 CP 1015 64 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Table 2 33 Inputs mode setting Jumpers setting Input application binary inputs Din analog inputs Aln voltage measurement PASSIVE CURRENT analog inputs Aln connection of passive resistor detectors analog inputs Aln current measurement Analog inputs are brought out to the terminals in the array DIGITAL ANALOG INPUTS In the fig 2 28 there is a schematic drawing of the connection of individual sources of signals to analog inputs 65 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT CP 101x module displ
161. grammable controllers the serial channel that are permitted for the given module On the contrary if this submodule is not identified then it is not possible to set the mode required by this submodule too non existing auxiliary table The auxiliary table the initialization table adverts to does not exist The table must be declared a new compilation must be made and the corrected user program must be loaded into the PLC again Auxiliary tables are used in the for example PFB mode invalid speed in the initialization table of the serial channel This communication speed cannot be used in the given mode of the serial channel station address collision There is a subordinated station with the same address as the address of the superior station entered in the MPC or PFB mode One of these addresses must be changed In the MPC or PFB mode a station with an address outside the permitted range was entered invalid number of network participants at MPC PLC or PFB modes incorrect number of data blocks in the UPD mode The maximum permitted number of network participants in MPC PLC or PFB modes was exceeded The maximum number of data blocks offered by the submodule was exceeded in the UPD mode In the initialization the number of the data blocks must be harmonized with the type of the submodule Also an incorrect or illegible configuration record in the submodule can be a cause of this problem number of network participants in t
162. gt input optical performance og PP ba 0 Interconnecting optical cables We accomplish the cable connection in such a way that we remove dust shields from the module by pulling and insert ST connectors of optical cables In the fibre connection transmitter Tx must always be connected with receiver Rx of the opposite module Table 4 3 Basic parameters of optical cables with glass multi mode fiber Optical connection connector Duplex 2x ST Frequency length of optical device 820 nm glass multimode 62 5 125 mm or 50 125 um Operating temperature 40T to 85 C Installation temperature 0 Tto 70T Attenuation of 1 km cable length a o 835dim O Max short term load in tension 30 min 500 N Delay given by distribution speed 5 ns m Max continuous tension load Max permanent bend radius 35 mm External diameter of a cover of one fiber 2x Handling is undertaken when the whole FOXTROT system is switched off only Handling when switched on can damage the modules Every time the optical cable is removed it is necessary to use the rubber covers and always blind the optical transceiver and receiver Otherwise damage caused by dust can occur 161 TXV 004 10 02 4 Transportation storage and installation of PLCs Side View le 1 45 LN 1 EE Is 2 32 k 1 46 gt 551 i Fig 4 2 Mechanical dimensions of the ST optical connector T
163. h on the central unit detects this problem and repairs it without any consequences However should we remove the card with such disturbed content from the system and we try to read it on a different device all data can be lost This risk can be safely avoided so that we switch the central unit to the HALT mode before we switch the PLC off e g from the Mosaic environment The central unit will cease the use program operation and close all opened files on the memory card Then it is possible to switch the PLC off and remove safely the memory card ATTENTION Modules contain components sensitive to electrostatic charge therefore user guides for these circuits must be abided The manipulation is undertaken on the module and inputs and outputs that are disconnected from the power supply only 189 TXV 004 10 02 5 PLC operation 5 7 2 Webserver The central unit contains a Web server that enables the technology state viewing via the common internet browsers as is for example Internet Explorer Firefox etc Individual pages are created in the XML language In Mosaic the Webmaker is used for pages creation that contains graphic editor allowing the insertion of pictures texts and PLC user program variables Files created are saved on the memory card in the folder ROOT WWW As a consequence the memory card must be inserted in the central unit to ensure the functioning of the Web server Files for the Web server are part of the PLC pr
164. he Err sign and the full error code the error description is displayed on the last two lines A detailed description of the PLC behaviour during various errors occurance possible causes and troubleshooting is given in chapter 6 Behaviour of the PLC during the power failure In case of a power failure either by intentional power supply switch off or caused by a defect of power supply lines or by a PLC power supply part defect the central unit is informed on voltage drop in advance so that defined system shutdown is performed including ensuring of the correct content of user tables if the writing process was just performed and ensuring correct content of the remnant zone Afterwards the central unit is stopped and the O character appears on the display In case of a short term power drop when power supply was not completely off drop out the central unit performs reset after approx 1 5 s and the system executes the switching sequence see chapter 5 3 If the following notice will appear on the display communication Err with CPU was IEONSIE the loss of connection between the display and the central unit occurred This can happen during the short term power failure After the restitution of the connection the display will 175 TXV 004 10 02 5 PLC operation display data sent by the central unit again Table 5 3 Indication of operating mode of central units Central unit state Display LED indication CP 1004 CP 10
165. he MPC PLC or PFB modes exceed the number of lines Information on the number of participants does not correspond with following data in the initialization table This error is generated by the number of network participants 1 or 0 too Check the correctness of the content of the initialization table or use the configuration using the Mosaic development environment non permissible number of the local port The number of the local port was set within the range 61680 61699 via the Ethernet interface in the UNI mode These values are reserved for system use of in built protocols It is necessary to use a number outside this range unknown Ethernet interface protocol An unknown protocol UDP TCP etc was set via the Ethernet interface in the UNI mode It is necessary to set the correct protocol or to update the software version of the relevant communication module 197 TXV 004 10 02 83 cc 3815 83 cc 4204 83 cc 4206 83 cc 4207 83 cc 4208 6 Diagnostics and troubleshooting false connection The false connection index was set via the Ethernet interface in the UNI mode It is necessary to check the maximum possible number of connections within the relevant communication module This error occurs even in case when the number of connections was increased in the newer firmware version only than in the one loaded in this communication module The module firmware must be re loaded communication channel is not in the requ
166. he connection of PLC inputs and outputs must correspond to the requirements stated in the Manual for designing of programmable logic controllers TECOMAT FOXTROT TXV 004 11 02 Interference accident prevention To reduce the level of interference in the distributing frame with the installed PLC all inductive loads must be equipped with suppression components Interference elimination sets are supplied for this purpose table 4 6 4 7 The interference elimination set serves also for protection of the binary DC and AC input PLC modules against voltage peaks arising primarily during the inductive load control Protection must be undertaken directly on the load due to the maximum elimination of interference spread as a source of possible failures As protective members varistors or RC members are supplied whereas the highest efficiency can be reached by combination of both protection types Of course the set can be used anywhere within controlled technologies to protect contacts or for protection against interferences arising during control processes An example of connection of the protection element is illustrated in fig 4 3 The principles of interference elimination in the position of its source as close as possible load must be taken into consideration 163 TXV 004 10 02 4 Transportation storage and installation of PLCs power supply
167. he input is in log 1 impulse length measurement period or phase shift period measuring VALB second input value interpretation according to the counter mode udint type counter value 1B pair of counters captured value counter and IRC with capturing and resetting period during which the input is in log 0 impulse length measurement counter inputs object 2 TCNTF IN structure SONT counter status word 2 16times boolean type L0 OS 9 EPS 0 0 EG EV bit 6 29 4 3 2 1 0 5g 41 19 9 JEEPSBAE Bo E09 T 9 EVB T bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 EV 1 active edge tag on DI2 according to the mode 42 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers EG 1 active edge tag on DI3 according to the mode EPS 1 achieved preset tag EVB 1 active edge tag on DI3 B counter EPSB 1 achieved preset tag B counter CNT_IN2 VALA counter value 2 udint type CNT_IN2 VALB counter value 2B pair of counters udint type AIO AI Al2 AI3 analog inputs objects AIO AI3 TAI structure Aln STAT Aln FS Aln ENG Aln PCT analog input Aln status word 16times boolean type o 1 005 g o BES OVF OVA 07 1o 50 1 bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 A 0 E voc 0s 7 9 49 sspe si 12 11 10 9 8 bit 15 14 13 FLS 1 invalid measured value during module launching after switch on OVF 1 range overflow input value exceeded the nominal range by 5 OVR 1 range exceeding
168. he main error stack of the central unit 220 4 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers 1 INTRODUCTION TO THE TECOMAT FOXTROT PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 1 1 INTRODUCTION What is a programmable logic controller A programmable logic controller thereinafter PLC is a digital control electronic system designed for control of industrial machines and processes within industrial environment Through digital or analog inputs and outputs the PLC receives and sends information from into the unit being controlled Control algorithms are saved in the memory of the user program that is executed cyclically Principles of user program execution The control algorithm of the PLC is written in as a sequence of instructions in the user program memory The central unit reads stepwise the individual instructions from this memory executes corresponding data operations in the notepad memory and in the stack or eventually executes transitions in the sequence of instructions providing the instruction belongs to the group of organizational instructions After all instructions of the required algorithm are executed the central unit updates output variables into output peripheral modules and updates the states from input peripheral modules into the notepad memory This process repeat itself continuously and it is called program cycle Fig 1 1 1 2 Unrepeated updates of the states of input variables within the whol
169. he maximum cable length depends on the optical output emitted receiver s sensitivity and the attenuation of the used cable L max Pr max Primax a m L max maximum length Pr max smallest optical output value of emitter PRL max biggest value of input optical output for log O a attenuation value of cable at 1 m of length Transceiver output is also dependent on the temperature Pr Pr 256 APT AT x t 250 The cable attenuation is also dependent on the temperature Or a Aar AT x t 250 4 4 PLC INSTALLATION PLC FOXTROT units are designed to be mounted onto the U bar corresponding to CSN EN 50022 In cases without a forced ventilation the PLC must be placed in a distance of a minimum of 100 mm between the top and bottom part of the PLC and the top and bottom of the case If a good natural ventilation can not be ensured then it is necessary to ensure ventilation using an internal ventilator The maximum allowed air temperature entering the PLC is 55C PLCs are designed for the pollution level 2 The installation must be undertaken in such a manner that conditions of the II surge category will not be exceeded The size and design of the case must be chosen with respect to the power input of the i devices installed and with respect to the permitted operation temperature of the PLC surrounding environment chapter 1 5 It is necessary to take into account also performance losses that arise on inputs and output
170. hree groups according to their function general serial interfaces special buses sequencers binary inputs and outputs 19 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT basic modules First group submodules are used for transfer of serial data of the TTL level to levels of the corresponding interface RS 232 RS 485 RS 422 M Bus Therefore it is a standard serial communication in modes PC PLC MPC UNI MDB and PFB Second group submodules are used for connection of a special bus PROFIBUS DP CAN to the PLC Submodule is in this case fitted with a special sequencer that itself contains a bus and exchange actual data only with the PLC central unit It concerns modes DPS and CSJ Third group submodules has basically nothing in common with serial communication nevertheless they use connectors and controls dedicated to the serial channel CH2 The serial channel is in this case set to the UPD mode PX 78xx submodules that enable to increase the number of inputs and outputs on the basic module belong to this group All submodules are equipped with the identification record that can be read in the Mosaic development environment Thus the current mounting of the basic module can be detected If there is on the serial channel set a mode that the exchangeable submodule does not support table 2 7 the serial channel is switched off OFF mode Table 2 7 Order numbers of exchangeable submodules number MR 0104 interface RS 232 with galvanic isolation
171. iable value STAT FS ENG PCT E s 31500 ur eae SUO EE overflowing 400 E EIE NM Lm 1 _5 108 range range exceeding 378 0000 30000 0000 nominal range o 0000 E EIE m mam e Table 3 4 16 Transferred values of analog inputs for Ni1000 Measured Variable value STAT FS ENG PCT 000C 31500 200 0004 31500 108 lt 0004 a 105 range range exceeding 188 0000 90000 20000 nominal range A C 0000 0002 0002 500 mae range descended range descended 0003 1500 99 5 range underflowing 137 TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules IT 1602 module Table 3 4 17 Transferred values of analog inputs for NTC thermistors Measured Variable value STAT FS ENG PCT 1 a EELE 0004 H 500 1 128 1 e 0004 195 range range exceeding 117 5 E 0000 Lo E 17 5 0000 nominal range Eum 5 0000 5 EZZ 40 EZZ 1 i i range descended range descended 0003 a ERE DEN EEE RN 1050 105 Q 1000 1000 500 5020 Binary value 1 0 020 o 2 S S v e 2 amp 2 2 SS PCT Fig 3 4 11 Analog inputs range of the IT 1601 module for resistance transmitters OV100 and OV1000 Table 3 4 18 Transferred values of analog inputs for OV100 Measured Variable value STAT ENG PCT pss Pe 100 Q 30000 nominal range 00 138 TXV 004 10 02 TEC
172. iable for panel keyb Add new declare variable for panel keyb USINT Use existing variable for panel keyb USINT DI1073 UseiKeyb J OK X Cancel Help Fig 2 44 The OI 1073 display configuration In the top section we select the character set according to which the display will decode the displayed text Available are Windows central European CP1250 Windows Cyrillic CP1251 Windows western European CP1252 Windows Greek CP1253 The item Keyboard autorepeat delay determines the time mind after which during the long term press of the button the button autorepeat is activated i e the state when the pressed button code is continuously transferred until it is iind The autorepeat delay 87 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT CP 101x module display Ol 1073 can be set within the range of O up to 1500 ms in the step after 100 ms If we want to switch the autorepeat off we set the delay value to 0 By ticking the item Use the terminal character the function of the terminal character transfer FF code is activated after the pressed button is released This function is useful in particular while using the autorepeat function and is used for short and long keystroke recognition Setup of user keys item determines the manner in which pressed key code is accessed This setting has a meaning for PanelMaker The option Don t use variable for panel key means that the pressed key processing is completely done by Pa
173. iable is a real type variable and represents directly the value in engineering units according to the measuring range selected The transferred value in the PCT variable is a real type variable and represents the percentage relation between nominal and measured value of the analog input The PCT variable is related to the FS variable It applies that for the value FS 0 is the PCT 0 and for the value FS 30000 the PCT 100 The PCT variable can reach a maximum value of 105 which corresponds to FS 31500 If we want to filter the input analog value we switch the filtration mode on and set the time constant Measured values of the correspondent channel then go through the 1st grade filter The filter is due to the following relation _ Ym THX T 1 t x Converted value of the analog input y output Yi 1 last output c time constant of the 1st grade filter 132 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers The time constant value is set in the range 0 1 25 0 s The filtration concerns all data formats of the channel given FS ENG and PCT and is accessible within all measuring ranges Module settings IT 1601 Analog inputs Analog outputs ChannelAl0 AI3 Channel l4 Al7 Summary Iv Channel AIO Passing of value Binary value FS J Engineering value ENG Normalised value PCT v Filtering mode Time constant 1 s WV Channel Al2 RTD sensor Pt100 w10021 385 Passing of
174. idental error caused by the engagement of the processor of the periphery during data exchange with the central unit This error is eliminated so that the resultant value of the measuring is gained through the average value of the last eight pulses captured Therefore it is supposed that the detected signal is represented by pulses repeated in particular period The absolute error of the measuring is max 10 us and decrease as the PLC cycle period is increased For newer variant named IR 1057 more powerful processor is used The absolute error of the measuring max 10 us is valid for each individual measuring The result value means actual measured value In this case we can measure non periodical signal too IRC1 IRC2 V Q V G e t P N 24V U ed e e A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 AT A8 A9 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 amp CO 8 NM NT e MN a SES ea ps qtiadtjactjac DIGITAL ANALOG INPUTS SH a eo a EN a RxD xl RTS i o in o BUS CH1 RS 232 DIGITAL SPECIAL INPUTS Fig 2 14 Example of the two incremental encoders IRC connection 39 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT basic modules CP 10x4 module IR 1055 IR 1057 peripheries incremental encoder V GNI e F el N 24V U NC _ L 7 measurement point input A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 AT A8 A9 B1 B2
175. in the field DIGITAL SPECIAL INPUTS Input electric parameters can be found in the table 2 24 time parameters in table 2 27 and an overview of modes in 2 28 37 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT basic modules CP 10x4 module IR 1055 IR 1057 peripheries Table 2 27 Time parameters of counter inputs Counter modes Input frequency 5 kHz Pulse width min 50 us log 0 to log 1 delay 5 us log 1 to log O delay Hegister range to 4 294 967 295 32 bits Incremental counters IRC symetric signal frequency V G Pulse width V G NI MD min 50 us log 0 to log 1 delay 5 us Ed log 1 to log 0 delay 5 us Register range 0 up to 4 294 967 295 32 bits Input frequency 0 1 up to 5000 Hz Pulse width 50 up to 10 000 000 us Table 2 28 Overview of counter modes One one way counter UP UP Two one way counters UP UPB UP UPB Counter with controlled direction DIR CLK DIR Basic IRC MEL ve ip m s qr Ne ua ar Counter with controlled direction and A e d with reset and capturing IRC with reset and capturing Go N MD Period and phase shift measuring period both function switchable during input selectable during phase shift measured between DI1 and DIO Overview of abbreviations of various signals UPB pulse input for B counter incrementation DOWN pulse input for counter decrementation DIR counter direction CLR counter resetting Pulse
176. in the status zone of the peripheral system that informs on the immediate status of each peripheral module This is important especially in situations when hot swap of the peripheral module is allowed the possibility to switch peripheral module power supply off and on under the module running and the user program requires information whether data read from the module are valid This zone can also be used for a detailed PLC diagnostics realized by the superior system Each module corresponds to one register which index is assigned as follows 100 central unit part of CP 10xx basic module 101 in built display part of CP 101x basic module 102 internal master bus CIB part of CP 10xx basic module 103 peripheral part of the CP 10xx basic module 108 S111 operator panels with addresses 8 to 11 116 S125 peripheral modules with address 0 to 9 148 S163 external master bus CIB All registers of the status zone have the following structure Sn7 S Sn6 Sn5 Sn4 Sn3 Sn2 Sn1 Sn 0 POS OTH DEC ERR 0 0 DATA ECOM Sn 0 ECOM status of communication with module 0 communication is OK 1 module stopped communicating Sn 1 DATA validity of transmitted data 0 data in the notepad are not up to date data exchange is not in progress 1 data in the notepad are up to date data exchange is in progress Sn 4 ERR module reports an error 0 module runs without any error 1 module reports a critical erro
177. ing sequence The switching sequence can be terminated in three possible ways If everything is O K then after the switching sequence is terminated the PLC starts executing the user program and controlling the technology connected Should the PLC diagnostics evaluate a critical error during the switching sequence the PLC will stay in the HALT mode and signalize the error The third possibility is to prohibit the user program execution via the option described below PLC stays in the HALT mode after the switching sequence is accomplished 168 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Table 5 2 The standard switching sequence of central units CP 1014 CP 1015 Central unit activity LED indication OK no errors ER error 1 System switch on system G w El eis Bl lial we 2 Basic initialization and hw unit testing OK transfer to next activity system Stewarts neg ER error in launching or in main firmware rather of the central unit switching sequence is stopped PLC cannot be operated Menu when the MODE button is continuously pressed during the power supply switch on the menu will appear 3 Initialization of the bus and system software processor displaying of the basic module type and of versions of the central unit sw and hw FOXTROT CEPI ol to bh 4 Sw VIP SIIEE5 h w v0200 Setyaer tung HN 169 TXV 004 10 02 5 PLC operation Table 5 2 The standard switching sequence of central u
178. ing the configuration as active the current counter content will be copied into the VALB variable providing that in the control word MD and FMD bits are set to log 1 If the entering edge appears on the MD input up to the level which has been selected during the configuration as active the counter content will be cleared by a single application providing that in the control word the MD bit is set to log 1 and the FMD bit to log 0 The control word can also control the counter run EN bit reset the counter RES bit or set its content to a SET variable value SET bit SCNT counter status word 0 0 0 PS EMD ENI EG EV uf 6 5 4 3 2 J 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 EV 1 entering edge tag on input UP EG 1 entering edge tag on input DOWN ENI 1 active edge tag on input CLR EMD 1 active edge tag on input CAP PS 1 achieved preset tag CCNT counter control word 0 FMD MD NI FC SET RES EN 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 57 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT basic modules CP 10x4 module IR 1055 IR 1057 peripheries 0 0 eo eo 0 0 0 sh 14 13 12 11 EN 0 counter stopped 1 counter counts RES 1 counter resetting and clearing 0 10 SET 1 setting counter to the SET variable value FC 0 counter free run 1 clearing the counter after SET variable is gained NI 1 counter clearing from input
179. initialization of the user program execution At the MOSAIC development environment the configuration is entered by filling in of the forms and based on them the environment generates directives module Generally these directives contain the following information on each operated PLC peripheral module e Module address e Information on e g assignment of the serial channel number CHn to a particular communication module e Number of transmitted input and output bytes of modules e Position in the PLC notepad where the read sent data from to the module are displayed start of the continuous zone in the area X Y e Reference to the T table containing initialization data These information allows checking the readiness of the entire PLC to perform control activities before program initialization The Mosaic development environment enables manual and automatic FOXTROT PLC configuration First in the Project manager select the FOXTROT modular system in the folder Hw PLC series selection and choose a basic PLC module type fig 5 2 Then we can configure the PLC fig 5 3 fig 5 4 in the folder Hw HW configuration in the Project manager Project manager PLC Address 0 Connection type Not connected Common settings Autogenerate config file Configuration can t be changed Suppress IO modules Hw Select type of PLC series Hw Configuration PLC Network logical connection Sw Program Cpm Compiler Sending file
180. input value real type The percentage relation between the measured and the nominal value of the analog input For the value FS 0 applies the value of PCT 0 and for the value FS 30000 the value PCT 100 The behaviour of individual data objects is described in the following chapter 148 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers 3 4 2 4 Initialization and behaviour of individual data objects of the IT 1602 module The IT 1602 peripheral module contains a block of analog inputs and outputs The panel for parameters setting can be opened from the project manager in the node HW Configuration HW fig 3 4 18 In the folder External I O modules we click on the K icon on the relevant line Project manager PLC Address 0 Connection type Not connecte Common settings Hw Select type of PLC series Hw Configuration Foxtrot utogenerate config file C Configuration can t be changed Suppre PLC Network logical conr MEN CPU Estem 1 0 modules Extern CIB Displays Environment a ea Documentation TXN 113 01 TXN 115 01 TAN 114 01 TXN 116 01 a LU NN SA Accessories Fig 3 4 18 Peripheral modules configuration Analog inputs The IT 1602 module contains 8 analog inputs AIO to AI7 which have various measuring ranges Each input has four variables STAT FS ENG and PCT State STAT is always transferred among variables FS ENG and PCT we choose one depending on the interp
181. inputs for counters Module settings IR 1501 Binary 10 counter made enable detect short impulses short impulses polarity short impulses detected DIO DIO short impulses detected into 1 short impulses detected DI1 DI short impulses detected into 1 short impulses detected DI2 Dl2 short impulses detected into 1 short impulses detected DI3 DIS short impulses detected into 1 w Enable binary inputs carry from DIO to DIS w Enable binary outputs carry from DOO to DO Enable ignore module error i i x Cancel Help Fig 3 3 8 Configuration of binary inputs and outputs If we check an item Enable ignoring module error at the bottom side of R 1501 Module settings pane CPU doesn t stop user program performing even when the fatal error of data exchange with this module occurs but it tries to reinitialize the module and renew the communication The actual module status and the validity of data can be found in peripheral system status zone chap 6 5 This function can be used in case we want to keep PLC running even if peripheral module power supply is switched off Configuration of binary inputs can be found in the folder Binary IO Fig 3 3 8 By ticking the option Switch on the transfer of binary inputs DIO to DI7 switched on we can enable the transfer of current states of all four inputs into the PLC notepad If this option is not ticked relevant values are not transferred and do not appear in the PLC notepad It is p
182. interface The MR 0158 submodule enables the waking up of a standard M Bus line with six slave stations The power supply current of the line is ensured by an internal increasing stabilizer from the separating power supply converter of the TTL The transmitter modulator can be alternatively supplied by an external power supply Ucc3 36 V 50 mA then it is possible to connect up to 20 slaves to the line The current assessment is dynamical thus enables the change of the number of connected units without any additional configuration The serial channel must be set to the UNI mode and its own protocol must be executed via the user program Table 2 17 Connection of the terminal board of the serial channel CH2 while submodule MR 0158 is fitted pem c eeu M Bus bus level M M M Bus bus level 2 2 2 7 Expansion of further binary inputs and outputs PX 7811 and PX 7812 submodules enable increasing of the number of binary inputs and outputs on the basic module in cases when the serial channel CH2 is not used in any other way The PX 7811 submodule contains 7 binary inputs the PX 7812 submodule contains 4 binary inputs and 3 binary outputs These inputs and outputs are galvanically isolated It is necessary to set the serial channel to the UPD mode Inputs and outputs connection to the terminal board C is shown in table 2 18 PX 7811 and table 2 19 PX 7812 24 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Table
183. ion read error no record module identification read error invalid record length module identification read error invalid record data hw module configuration error no data for configuration hw module configuration error invalid configuration data hw module configuration error invalid configuration data module did not respond to communication service ss initialization is not finished the bus did not return any reaction to communication service ss the bus is not free after communication service ss module responded with invalid data to communication service ss data exchange unknown mode communication interrupt with central unit peripheral module receives no data data cannot be transmitted at the HALT mode non available bus service non available bus service hw module failure unknown bus service invalid software of peripheral module Peripheral module power supply low other errors reported by the peripheral module are described in the documentation for this module FF kk kkkk central unit system error Kk any number specifying error type 222 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers 223 TXV 004 10 02 teen For more information contact us Teco a s Havl kova 260 280 58 Kolin 4 Czech Republic tel 321 737 611 fax 321 737 633 e mail teco tecomat cz www tecomat com TXV 004 10 02 We reserve the right to make modifications and or changes of the documentation without prior notice
184. ired mode The serial channel is set to another mode than the initialization is designated for The reason of this error is usually caused by the fact that the serial channel does not allow the setting of the required mode and sets itself to the off mode thus it switches off Special submodules requiring special operation are identified by the central unit automatically and only such modes can then be set on the serial channel that are permitted to the module given On the contrary if this submodule is not identified then it is not possible to set the mode required by this submodule too maximum volume of transmitted data within one network or one participant exceeded The specified volume of transmitted data in the network in MPC or PLC modes exceeded the maximum value One network allows data transfer of a total volume of approx 32 KB A second reason of this fault can be that the specified volume of transmitted data with one participant exceeded the maximum value For other modes the specified volume of data transmitted exceeded the maximum size which the communication submodule is able to transmit in some of data areas serial channel cannot be assigned permanently occupied by another module The number we want to assign to the serial channel is already occupied non permissible mode of the communication channel The required mode cannot be set on this communication channel The reasons can be as follows the selected comm
185. it indicated during the switching sequence are given in chapter 5 3 The indication of operating modes can be found in chapter 5 4 Error division according to severity Errors that can occur in PLC can be divided according to their severity into two groups a Critical errors making an error free control impossible LED diodes ERR and RUN are on the PLC switches to the HALT mode and block outputs the last error is displayed b Other errors not affecting significantly the control itself The ERR LED is not on the LED diode RUN is flashing the PLC remains at the RUN mode the error code is written to registers S48 to S51 and is available for processing by the user program the interrupt process P43 initiated by this error can also be used 6 3 FATAL ERRORS In cases that a fatal error occurs the diagnostic system first of all blocks outputs interrupts the user program execution and identifies the fault Information on the fault can be found either on the display of the central unit last error only or it can be reproached from the error stack to the superior system PC The indication of the error can be cancelled by the command from the superior system or by switching the PLC power supply off and on 6 3 1 User program and central unit hardware errors Errors are reported by the central unit The user program map is the main control structure generated by the compiler Numerical codes are in hexadecimal form as they are displayed U
186. itch on OVF 1 range overflow input quantity exceeded the nominal range at 5 OVR 1 range exceeding input quantity exceeded the nominal range UNR 1 range nonfulfilment input quantity did not reach the nominal range UNF 1 range underflow input quantity did not reach the nominal range at 5 bit 147 TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules IT 1602 module While setting any of the bits OVF and UNF to log 1 the red LED diode correspondent to the input given lights up Aln FS analog input Aln value int type The minimum input value matches the value 0 the maximum value matches 31500 by which it is valid that 100 of the nominal range of the analog input matches the value FS 30000 Aln ENG Aln analog input value real type Value of measured quantity in engineering units Aln PCT Aln analog input value real type The percentage relation between the measured and the nominal value of the analog input For the value FS 0 applies the value of PCT 0 and for the value FS 30000 the value PCT 100 Output data AOO AO1 analog inputs objects AOO AO1 TAO_TC6 structure AOn FS AOn analog input value int type The minimum input value matches the value 0 the maximum value matches 31500 by which it is valid that 100 of the nominal range of the analog input matches the value FS 30000 AOn ENG AOn analog input value real type Value of measured voltage in volts AOn PCT AOn analog
187. ith the register RO the state of the registers is backed up after the last cycle of the user program is fully completed The default value is O Project manager PLC Address 0 Use as default Connection type Not connected Common settings Hw CPM type K Select type of PLC series y HW Configuration Output blocking RUN control PLC Network logical connection f Off f Off Sw C Active with 0 C Active with D Program C Active with T Active with 1 Compiler PLC restart Sending files to PLC C Wam Environment Documentation Protected tables Cold First warning 150 ms Crash time 250 ms Remanent register zone 0 Change daylight saving time automatically Default Fig 5 1 Configuration constants setting e Automatic switching to the daylight saving time This setup causes that the system will switch the system time automatically to the daylight saving time in phase from the last March Sunday 02 00 a m to the last October Sunday 03 00 a m Time indication is accessible on the bit S35 6 0 winter time 1 daylight saving time The bit 835 7 indicates the function activity 1 on By default this function is off 182 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers 5 5 2 PLC configuration The configuration of peripheral modules describes the PLC set and is integral part of the user program This description is compared to the reality found during the PLC switching sequence before the
188. ithout a loss the original setting If the option is enabled then modules that have been already configured and found at the same positions will keep their settings The other newly found or modified modules another type at the same position have their configuration set to initial values If this option is disabled all the modules will have their configuration set to their initial values Any possible previous setting will be lost If we do not want to include some of the found modules to the configuration we click on the ticked square on the left edge of the line with the name of this module By pressing the button Apply the list offered will be accepted Consequently individual configuration dialogues for all modules are automatically offered After this operation is finished the object is ready for debugging with the concrete PLC set which is available Connected PLC configuration Rack Position Module type Version Note My o CP 1004 43H0100 CPM K 192kB 64kB RAM SCH ETH webserver D d 1 0 05 1401 12H0100 12xD0 v 1 1 IR 1501 12H0100 4sDI 8xD0 counters v 1 3 IB 1301 12H0100 12xD1 counters J OK X Cancel Help Fig 5 5 Download of configuration from PLC As it can be understood from the above mentioned the automatically set PLC configuration can be modified manually at any time and vice versa Disconnection of the peripheral module operation The operation of any of peripheral modules can be disconnected
189. ividual signal types are connectable to any input Table 3 4 24 Basic parameters of voltage input ranges Module type Analog input error max error at 25 0 3 of full range thermal coefficient 0 03 of full range K non linearity 0 08 of full range repeatability at steady conditions 0 03 96 of full range Max allowed permanent overload without 20 V each terminal Al against AGND damage Total time of the system input transfer type 65 ms Sample repeating time type 500 ms Overload signalization in the status word and by LED diode on the front panel Disconnected input detection none 144 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Table 3 4 25 Basic parameters of inout ranges for thermocouples Module type IT 1602 Input impedance within the signal range Analog input error max error at 25 C 0 5 of full range thermal coefficient 0 05 96 of full range K non linearity 0 09 of full range repeatability at steady conditions 0 05 95 of full range Max allowed permanent overload without 20 V each terminal Al against AGND damage Total time of the system input transfer max 100 ms Sample repeating time max 800 ms Overload signalization in the status word and by LED diode on the front panel Disconnected input detection none Disconnected sensor detection in the status word and by LED diode on the front panel range exceeded 3 4 2 2 Analog outputs Analog outputs se
190. ject group we enter to the field Name of new project group the name under which the project group containing the archived projects will be created After pressing the button Create and open the project group will be created and opened according to the name entered and it will contain all projects that were downloaded from the PLC archive Restoring project group from PLC Password settings Project group Foxtrot manual Password xxx e Project PLC1 12 3 2009 New project group Name of new project group RestoredProjectGroup Make and open X Cancel 7 Help Fig 5 7 Project restoration from the PLC 187 TXV 004 10 02 5 PLC operation 5 6 TESTING OF I O SIGNALS CONNECTED TO THE PLC For the basic testing of input and output signals connected to the PLC it is sufficient to create an empty program containing only software configuration of the PLC being tested and instructions P 0 and E 0 which create an empty basic process Thereafter using debugging means of the MOSAIC development environment we can monitor the states of connected inputs and set any values on PLC outputs This easy but very effective method is recommended to be undertaken before the user program debugging since the entire path from input members terminal switches through input units to the PLC working memory and back from the notepad memory through output units to action members will be tested Hereby errors arisen during the PLC connection to
191. ken by interconnection of terminals TxRx s BT a TxRx s BT The galvanic isolation of the serial interface is provided by an in built converter and an external power supply is not needed 21 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT basic modules Table 2 10 Technical parameters of the submodule MR 01 14 Galvanic isolation yes Insulating voltage of galvanic isolation 1000 VDC Max transmission rate 2 MBd Receiver sensitivity min 200 mV Output signal level type 3 7 V Max length of the line connected 1200 m The maximum length applies to twisted and shielded cable and a communication rate of max 120 kBd Table 2 11 Connection of the terminal board of the serial channel CH2 while submodule MR 01 14 is fitted TxRx data received and sent level TxRx data received and sent level TxRx data received and sent level TxRx data received and sent level 2 2 2 3 RS 422 interface The MR 0124 submodule ensures the transfer of galvanically separated serial interface TTL signals to the RS 422 interface The interface allows the connection of two cooperating devices consequently it cannot be used for networks an exception is for example the connection of ID Ox series panels Table 2 12 Technical parameters of the submodule MR 0124 Galvanic isolation yes Insulating voltage of galvanic isolation 1000 VDC Max transmission rate 2 MBd Receiver sensitivity min 200 mV Output signal level type 3 7 V Max length of
192. l connection Sw Environment Documentation Fig 2 31 Configuration of the CP 1005 basic module Binary inputs The binary input state is contained in the DI variable The state of all universal inputs is valid only in such cases when inputs are not used as analog inputs If we check an item Enable ignore module error at the bottom side of R 1056 Module settings pane CPU doesn t stop user program performing even when the fatal error of data exchange with this module occurs but it tries to reinitialize the module and renew the communication The actual module status and the validity of data can be found in peripheral system status zone chap 6 5 72 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Module settings IR 1056 Binary IO Analog inputs Analog outputs Enable binary inputs carry Enable binary outputs carry Enable ignore module error X Cancel Help Fig 2 32 Configuration of binary inputs and outputs The configuration of binary inputs can be found in the folder Binary IO Fig 2 32 By ticking the option The switch on of the transfer of binary inputs DIO to DIZ we can enable the transfer of current states of all six inputs into the PLC notepad If this option is not ticked the relevant values are not transferred and will not show in the PLC notepad This selection has no effect on the inputs configuration Individual inputs behave as binary only whe
193. l where we enable the option Enable On line changes If the central unit does not support the on line changes this mode cannot be activated in the Mosaic development environment The enabled support of the on line changes is signalized in the Mosaic development environment on the menu bar by the flower symbol If the icon is coloured the support of the on line changes is on If the flower icon is grey the on line changes are off and each change to the program will result in stopping of the control when loading the new program to the PLC Detailed information on the on line changes can be found in the Help of the Mosaic development environment Possibilities of on line changes When using the on line change the programmer can modify the following parts of the program Program code i e any modifications of all parts of the program e Modifications of variables i e insertion and deleting of all types of variables such as modification of the field size Modifications of data types e g changes to structures adding of new data types and deleting data types not being used Modifications of the size of the remnant zone The following modifications cannot be performed within the on line change of the program Changes to hw configuration of the system such as addition of I O modules or changes to I O module types Changes to I O modules settings Changes to settings of communication parameters for serial channels
194. le 3 4 8 Transferred values of analog inputs for the range 0 to 10 V Measured Variable value STAT FS ENG PCT gt 105V 000C 31500 didum overflowing ae EL IE 81800 lt 8 E 318 106 range range exceeding 0000 30000 0000 nominal range 0 V 0000 Table 3 4 9 Transferred values of analog inputs for the range 0 to 5 V Measured Variable value STAT FS ENG PCT 5 25 V 000C 31500 5 es V 8 0008 131600 31 39g Eau 198 108 range range exceeding ES mum 0000 nominal range 0 V 0000 Table 3 4 10 Transferred values of analog inputs for the range 0 to 2 V Measured Variable value STAT FS ENG PCT 000C 31500 ieee overflowing 2 1 2 0004 3808 m 0004 108 range range exceeding 0000 Dum 0000 nominal range 0000 134 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Table 3 4 11 Transferred values of analog inputs for the range 0 to 1 V Measured Variable value STAT FS ENG PCT 000C EE 0000 30000 Sei geese 0000 5 25 21 mA 5 20 mA 2 5 10mA 1 0D 50 15000 100 30000 105 31500 PCT Fig 3 4 8 Current ranges 0 to 5 and 0 to 20 mA of analog inputs of the IT 1601 module Table3 4 12 Transferred values of analog inputs for the range 0 to 20 mA Measured Variable value STAT FS ENG PCT 000C 31500 o aaa overflowing 21 amA um __ 9064 31900 3159
195. lectrical item protection class CSN EN 61131 2 2005 idt IEC 61131 2 2003 Equipment type built in Coverage level CSN EN 60529 1993 idt IEC 529 1989 IP10B Service life 10 years 9 TXV 004 10 02 1 Introduction to the TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Table 1 2 Operational conditions Class of environment influence CSN 33 2000 3 Normal Operating temperatures range 0Cto 55C Permitted temperatures during transport 25 to 70 C Relative humidity 10 to 95 w o condensation Atmospheric pressure min 70 kPa 3000 m above sea level Degree of pollution CSN EN 61131 2 2 Over voltage category of installation CSN 33 0420 1 Working position vertical Type of operation continuous Vibration resistance sinusoidal vibrations 10 Hz to 57 Hz amplitude 0 075 mm Fc according to CSN EN 60068 2 6 57 Hz to 150 Hz acceleration 1G Electromagnetic compatibility Emissions CSN EN 55022 class B Immunity table 16 CSN EN 61131 2 Table 1 3 Storage conditions Storage environment dry clean rooms without conducting dust aggressive gases or acid vapours for the period not exceeding the guarantee period Storage temperatures 25 C to 70 C without temperature shocks Relative humidity max 8096 without vapour condensation Table 1 4 Transport conditions Transport environment Sheltered transport mean transport case must avoid rain and snow effects Transport temperatures 25 C to 70
196. length identification error invalid record data Reading of the identification record failed A repair by a specialist is necessary 194 TXV 004 10 02 80 45 0000 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers communication with RTC error Time reading or writing to RTC was unsuccessful Programming errors pc address of the instruction which the error occurred in program counter 80 1B tttt 90 00 pcpcpc 90 40 pcpcpc 90 80 pcpcpc 91 00 pcpcpc 91 40 pcpcpc 91 80 pcpcpc 91 CO pcpcpc 92 00 pcpcpc 92 40 pcpcpc invalid T table configuration t t t t is for table number The check sum of values of the T table used by this instruction does not agree The user program must be reloaded return address stack overflow The maximum number of subroutines nesting was exceeded By nesting we understand the calling of another subroutine within the subroutine being already executed return address stack underflow A subroutine CAL CAD CAC CAI call was not undertaken before a return instruction from the subroutine RET RED REC non zero stack of return addresses after process termination There is a different number of instructions for subroutine call CAL CAD CAC CAI in the user program than the number of return instructions from the subroutine RET RED REC label not declared A jump or call instruction with a label number was used which is not used anywhere in the user program label number is greate
197. ll be understood as the entering edge The same applies for the MD signal The individual counter object modes are identical to those of IR 1055 board of the CP 1004 module and are described in detail in the chapter 2 3 6 123 TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules IT 1602 module 3 4 ANALOG MODULES These modules contain analog inputs and outputs and are connected to the basic module via the TCL2 bus 3 4 4 IT 1601 module The IT 1601 peripheral module contains 8 analog inputs and 2 analog outputs All inputs and outputs have galvanic isolation The module is powered by 24 V DC which has no galvanic isolation from internal circuits ADR IT 1601 Fig 3 4 1 IT 1601 peripheral module Table 3 4 1 Basic parameters of the IT 1601 module Power supply voltage SELV 24 VDC 2595 1596 Internal protection ne Maximum input 4 5 W Connection fixed screw terminals max 2 5 mm conductor per terminal Galvanic isolation of supply from internal circuits between internal circuits and terminals supply and bus 500 V DC 8 Number of analog inputs Number of analog outputs 2 Size 53 x 95 x 65 mm 124 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers The terminals connection of the IT 1601 module is shown in the table 3 4 2 Table 3 4 2 Connection of terminal boards A and B of the IT 1601 module TCL2 system bus TCL2 A2 TCL2 system bus TCL2 A3 GND module ground A4 24V supply A5 A6 A7 AO1 anal
198. m3 S TC LINE 24V DI ANALOG OUTPUTS RUN BLK ABIR IT 1601 CPCI CI CI CI I CI CI CJ R aa AR 7k5 N U J U J e db od N N Pt100 ANIN N N Pttooo GIJE LK LA Ni1000 Ia NTC e o o e Obr 3 4 2 Typical example of signals connection to analog inputs of the IT 1601 module particular signal types are connectable to any input Table 3 4 4 Basic parameters of voltage input ranges Module type IT 1601 Input impedance within the signal range gt 100 kQ ranges 1 V and 2 V gt 20 kQ ranges 5 V and 10 V Analog input error max error at 25 C 0 3 of full range thermal coefficient 0 02 of full range K non linearity 0 08 of full range repeatability at steady conditions 0 05 96 of full range Max allowed permanent overload without 35 V each terminal Al against AGND damage Total time of the system input transfer type 65 ms Sample repeating time type 500 ms Overload signalization in status word and LED diode on the front panel Input disconnection detection none 127 TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules IT 1602 module Table 3 4 5 Basic parameters of current input ranges Analog input error max error at 25 0 4 of full range thermal coefficient 0 03 96 of full range K non linearity 0 07 of full range repeatability at steady conditions 0 05 95 of full range Max allowed permanent overload without 30 mA each
199. mmunication with superior systems via the MODBUS protocol Mode PFB connection of stations PROFIBUS DP slave Mode UPD operation of special parallel submodules Mode DPS realization of the station PROFIBUS DP slave from version sw 3 5 Mode CSJ connection of CAN bus with SJA1000 driver Ethernet ETH1 e Mode PC communication with superior systems via the EPSNET UDP protocol within TCP IP network e Mode PLC data sharing among the PLCs in the TCP IP network e Mode UNI common data exchange via UDP and TCP protocols e Mode MDB communication with superior systems via the MODBUS UDP and MODBUS TCP protocols from sw version 3 7 The communication parameters are set in the Mosaic development environment within the project The setting of serial channels and the Ethernet interface can be found in the Mosaic development environment If we press the push button MODE on the basic module the text with Ethernet ETH1 settings will show for the time the button is pressed A detailed description of communications can be found in a separate manual Serial communication of TECOMAT PLCs 32 bit model order number TXV 004 03 02 2 1 1 Indication elements and setting options Indication LED diodes Basic modules contain RUN and ERR LED diodes which indicate the mode the central unit is in see table 2 5 Under the Ethernet interface connector the LED diode is placed which when on indicates the physical connection to the Ethernet network doe
200. n After the batch is run the Flasher window will appear where already set values are assumed from the batch parameters Therefore it is sufficient to press the button FLASH only Further behaviour corresponds to the previous description After the programming termination we can alter parameters in the window usually the change of the module address or we close the program and run it again using another batch 219 TXV 004 10 02 Overview of errors APPENDIX Overview of errors saved to the main error stack of the central unit Used symbols cc communication channel number kk error code pc address of instruction which an error occurred in program counter pp position number in rack r rack number tt number of T table The numerical codes are in hexadecimal form Error code Error specification 02 cc 1200 02 cc 15hh 02 cc 16ss 02 cc 1809 07 00 0000 08 00 0000 10 00 0000 13 00 0000 14 00 0000 15 00 0000 70 05 0000 70 06 0000 70 07 0000 70 09 0000 70 OB 0000 70 24 0000 70 25 0000 7031rrpp 7034rrpp 70 43rrpp 7051rrpp 70 64r rpp 70 A1 rrpp 70 A2 rrpp 70 A3 rr pp 70 C5rrpp 70 C6rr pp 73 cc 3701 73 cc 3702 73 cc 3801 73 cc 3802 73 cc 3803 73 cc 3804 73 cc 3810 73 cc 3811 73 cc 3815 73 cc 4204 73 cc 4206 73 cc 4207 73 cc 4208 address error hh service byte error invalid parameters of communication service ss protection error remnant zone check error exceeding of the first limit
201. n clean spaces free from conductive dust aggressive gases and vapours The optimum storage temperature is 20 When storing the central unit for more than a half year it is recommended to take out or isolate the battery to avoid its discharging 4 2 SUPPLY OF PLC Individual components of the PLC FOXTROT are delivered in the separate packaging The assemblage is undertaken by the customer System assemblage is accomplished according to the following chapter 4 3 SYSTEM ASSEMBLY 4 3 4 Interconnection of individual modules Individual modules assembly If optional submodules which are delivered individually serial interfaces are necessary to be added to the module then these submodules will be delivered in a separate packaging and the customer will mount them according to the directions stated in the documentation provided with these modules chapter 2 2 2 Modules interconnection principles All modules of one PLC FOXTROT set i e all peripheral modules controlled by one basic module must be interconnected via the bus interconnection which is connected to terminals on the top left corner of each module TCL2 bus and optionally a power supply Terminal with an identical labeling are interconnected within all modules The interconnection of modules must be done linearly that means that modules are interconnected in a series one after the other and a branch line cannot be realized the 157 TXV 004 10 02 4 Transportation stora
202. n they are not used as analog inputs in the folder Analog inputs the channel with the similar number is not ticked Binary outputs Binary outputs state is contained in the DO variable The configuration of binary outputs can be found in the folder Binary IO Fig 2 32 By ticking the option The switch on of the transfer of binary inouts we can enable the transfer of current states of all six outputs from the PLC notepad into the module If this option is not ticked the relevant values are not transferred and outputs are not set Analog inputs The CP 1004 module contains 6 analog inputs AIO to AI5 with an optional measuring range from 0 to 10 V Each input has 4 variables STAT FS ENG and PCT The STAT status is transferred every time among variables FS ENG and PCT we choose one depending on the interpretation of the measured value required The configuration of analog inputs can be found in the folder Analog inputs Fig 2 33 It applies generally that if we tick the Channel Aln box the input n will behave as an analog Aln If the box Channel Aln is left blank then the input n will behave as a binary Din 73 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT CP 101x module display Ol 1073 Module settings IR 1056 Binary I0 Analog inputs Analog outputs V Channel AID MV Channel Al1 MV Channel Al2 Voltage range 0 10 RTD sensor PtHO00 W100 1 385 M Curent range O 20m4 Passing of value Passing of value Passing of value V Binary v
203. nals max 2 5 mm of the conductor on the terminal Supply galvanic isolation from internal circuits Number of inputs From which optional binary for counters Size 53 x 95 x 65 mm There is shown the connection of terminals of the IB 1301 module in the table 3 1 2 90 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Table 3 1 2 Connection of terminal boards A and B of the IB 1301 module B6 DIB Binary input DI8 1 O B9 JDH1 BinarinputDI1 ooo U OO 3 1 1 1 Binary inputs Binary inputs serve for the connection of two condition signals of the controlled object to the PLC The IB 1301 peripheral module contains 12 binary inputs DIO DI11 Inputs have galvanic isolation from PLC internal circuits The excitation switching is signalized by lighting of the LED diode up Inputs are in two groups with a joint terminal The first group contains inputs DIO DI3 and the second group contains inputs DI4 DI11 The joint terminal can be plus or minus for each group DIO DI3 inputs can be used as inputs for counters Even if these inputs are used alternatively as described they still can be used as binary inputs DIO DI3 inputs enable to switch on the function of the short impulses capturing This function extends the selected level of the input signal until the next PLC turn Therefore it can be ensured that individual pulses on the input which are shorter than the PLC cycle will not be lost Note I
204. nated especially for an application usage the MODE push button placed in the line on the left end is used for switching the display between user and system mode of projection In the RUN mode the display is switched to the user mode and displays characters defined by the application program running The display is switched to the system mode by short pressing of the push button MODE where it displays the PLC mode and the indication of DI inputs and DO outputs excitation Using the cursor keys we can browse among other information displays that shows IP address IP mask of the Ethernet interface IP network gateway address and settings of both serial channels By another short press of the button MODE the display will switch back to the user mode In other modes when the user program is not running the display is standardly switched to the system mode If the user program is not operated by the display then it stays permanently in the system mode 17 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT basic modules After switching the PLC power supply on the button MODE has several functions during the launching sequence If we do not press the button during the launching sequence the PLC will launch one of its operation modes RUN HALT with an error etc If we press the button MODE before the PLC power supply is switched on and we keep it pressed after the system has been started the list of modes will appear on the display Using the cursor keys we can choo
205. natives If we mark the item Freeze then after the transmission to the HALT mode the analog output stays set to the last value entered by the user program 153 TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules IT 1602 module Module settings IT 1602 Analog inputs Analog outputs Channel A00 AO1 j Channel 400 10 Accept value C Binary value FS iw Channel 401 v TTT Accept value C Binary value FS Engineering value ENG Normalised value PCT Engineering value ENG C Normalised value PCT Output during blocking Freeze C Defined status Output during blocking Freeze C Defined status Enable ignore module error J OK X Cancel Help Fig 3 4 22 Analog outputs configuration If we mark the item Defined state then after the transmission to the HALT mode the value set in the relevant field will be set to analog output This set value has the format identical to the selected transmitted variable This means that if we use the FS format the value is of an int type within the range 31500 31500 if we use the ENG format the value is of a real type within the range 10 5 10 5 V and if we use the PCT format the value is of a real type within the range 105 105 After the supply switch on analog outputs are always set to the value of 0 154 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Analog output 105V 10 V OV 10 V
206. nd Moreover while changing the floating battery that is located on the holder the program remains backed up in the Li ion battery thus it can not be deleted The program memory requires the backing up voltage of at least 2 1 V This means that if the battery voltage drops below this value the safe program and data backing up is not ensured after the floating battery is discharged If we exchange the discharged battery for a new one by this time the loss of content is avoided The battery voltage reduction below the value of 2 1 V is indicated in the 35 0 bit The exchange of the floating battery CR2032 type or similar 3 V 20 mm width 3 2 mm should be undertaken in the interval of 2 or 3 years The effective lifetime of this battery is usually 5 years The battery is inserted in the holder located on the front board of the basic module and is accessible after boards are removed from the case After the exchange is done the unneeded battery should be hand over to authorized organizations to be disposed of 18 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers ATTENTION Modules contain components sensitive to electrostatic charge therefore user guides for these circuits must be abided The manipulation is undertaken on the module that is disconnected from the power supply only No metal instrument forceps pliers etc must be used to avoid the battery short circuit Mind the right polarity Note The first series o
207. nelMaker and we will not process it in the user program The option Add new variable declaration for panel key allows entering a name of new variable in which we want to publish pressed key code for next processing to the field below this option The option Use existing variable for panel key allows entering a name of an existing variable in which we want to publish pressed key code for next processing to the field below this option The variable can be selected from the list which is displayed after button pressing 88 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers 3 TECOMAT FOXTROT PLC PERIPHERAL MODULES There is an overview of peripheral modules PLC FOXTROT in the table 3 1 The table 3 2 contains an overview of other modules that can be connected to the basic module PLC FOXTROT via the TCL2 bus Table 3 1 Peripheral modules variants of the FOXTROT system Type Description Order Chapter number IB 1301 ae inputs 24 V 4 of them usable as counters TXN 113 01 chap 3 1 1 OS 1401 12 binary transistor outputs 24 V TXN 114 E m 3 2 1 8 relay outputs 8 analog inputs unipolar voltage and current IT 1601 ranges passive resistor sensors 16 bits TXN 116 01 chap 3 4 1 2 analog unipolar voltage outputs 10 bits 8 analog inputs bipolar low voltage ranges IT 1602 thermocouples 16 bits TXN 116 02 chap 3 4 2 2 analog bipolar voltage outputs 10 bits Table 3 2 Alternatives of other modules connectable to the FOXTRO
208. ng and when connected incorrectly the damage on the submodule or even basic board can occur when switched back on 2 2 2 1 RS 232 interface The submodule MR 0104 ensures the transmission of the TTL signals of the serial interface to the RS 232 interface including the galvanic isolation This interface is designated for the interconnection of two participants only it can not be used within the network except e g connection of boards ID Ox in the slave mode It is applicable for e g connection of PLC TECOMAT and PC on short distances Table 2 8 Technical parameters of submodule MR 0104 Galvanic isolation yes Insulating voltage of galvanic isolation 1000 VDC Max transmission rate 200 kBd Input resistance of the receiver min 7 kQ Output signal level typ 8 V Max length of the line connected 15m Table 2 9 Connection of the terminal board of the serial channel CH2 while submodule MR 0104 is fitted 45V supply output 5V GND signal ground RTS modem sending prompt Oe eed CTS modem sending readiness o O RxD data received TxD data sent tl 2 2 2 2 RS 485 interface The submodule MR 0114 ensures the transmission of galvanically separated serial interface TTL signals to the RS 485 interface This type of the interface is used for connection of several participants on one line and for communication networks creation To ensure correct functioning it is necessary to terminate the line on its ends This can be underta
209. ng the configuration as active the counter content will be copied into the VALB variable providing that in the control word MD and FMD bits are set to log 1 If the entering edge appears on the CAP input up to the level which has been selected during the configuration as active the counter content will be cleared by a single application providing that in the control word the MD bit is set to log 1 and the FMD bit is set to log 0 The control word can also control the counter run EN bit reset the counter RES bit or set its content a SET variable value SET bit SCNT counter status word 0 0 0 PS EMD ENI EG EV uf 6 Es 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 EV 1 entering edge tag on input UP EG 1 entering edge tag on input DOWN ENI 1 active edge tag on input CLR EMD 1 active edge tag on input CAP PS 1 achieved preset tag CCNT counter control word 0 FM MD NI FC SET RES wi 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 EN 0 counter stopped 1 counter counts RES 1 counter resetting and clearing SET 1 setting counter to the SET variable value FC 0 counter free run 1 clearing the counter after variable SET value is gained w o l 55 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT basic modules CP 10x4 module IR 1055 IR 1057 peripheries NI 1 counter clearing from the input CLR MD 1 approval of input CA
210. ng the power supply on the system program ensures clearing of inputs and outputs and LEDs being on will go out after a while 166 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers This intermediate state caused by supply voltage surge does not show up on the outside since outputs are always locked immediately after the switching of power supply on and they unlock after the PLC is switched to the RUN mode if not set up otherwise by the user Basic modules CP 1004 and CP 1005 are equipped with unitary seven segment display while basic modules CP 1014 and CP 1015 are equipped with the display of 4 x 20 characters size If we will mention in the following text about a display without any further details then both types of display are meant 5 3 PLC SWITCHING SEQUENCE 5 3 1 Basic modules CP 1004 CP 1005 Table 5 1 Switching sequence of central units CP 1004 CP 1005 OK no errors indication ER error 1 Basic initialization and hw unit testing sw version OK transfer to next activity RUN on v3 5 ER error in launching or in main firmware rather ERR on switching sequence is stopped PLC cannot be xE operated TEST short button stroke during the power supply a a a switch on transfer into testing mode BOOT when the button is continuously pressed RUN on during the power supply switch on and about 3s after transfer into BOOT state possibility to change the firmware 2 Initialization of system software processor R
211. nits CP 1014 CP 1015 Central unit activity OK no errors ER error 4 SD MMC card connection RUN on ESOSXSOTUIRUQOUT CEPI lap ON Sw WB a 3 h w v02 starting E 5 Initialization of the file system and Web server FOXTROT CaP BT RON Sw WB S h w v 02 sot a ft ising HN 6 System hw configuration detection OK transfer to next activity RUN on ER error is written to the error stack RUN and ERR on 2 5 2 5 C 2 5 S CCS BS ee sess seu e 7 PLC initialization according to the user program OK transfer to next activity RUN on ER error is written to the error stack RUN and ERR on Err eiu ke Chel S c zx xp 9 235 n 2 5 Bn ee PhS LS 8 Activation of communication with superior system 9 PLC mode setup OK switching to RUN mode and start of the user program RUN flashing DI Ot 253 4 5 67 DO 012345 170 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Table 5 2 The standard switching sequence of central units CP 1014 CP 1015 Central unit activity LED indication OK no errors ER error OK when the MODE button was pressed during the power supply switch on and the HALT mode was selected in the menu table RUN on 5 3 user program is not started Halt ER if an error occurred during switching sequence RUN switching to HALT mode user program is not and ERR on started Err X X X X X XXX Error description PLC mode selection after the pow
212. ntains one two way counter of external events VALA variable equipped with UP DIO DOWN DI1 counter inputs CLR clearing input DI2 CAP capturing input DI3 and a preset SET variable This mode can be set in the first counter object only The second object must be switched off If the entering edge appears on the UP input the counter increases its content by 1 and in the status word in the EV bit the log 1 during one PLC cycle will show as an entering edge tag on the input If the entering edge appears on the DOWN input the counter decreases its contents by 1 and in the status word in the EG bit the log 1 during one PLC cycle will show as an entering edge tag on input If the resultant content of the counter is the same as the SET variable value then in the status word in the PS bit the log 1 during one PLC cycle will show as an achieved preset tag If the FC bit is set to log 1 in the control word the counter content will be cleared automatically If the entering edge appears on the CLR input up to the level which has been selected during the configuration as active the content will be cleared by a single application providing that in the control word is the NI bit set to log 1 The CAP input is multipurpose It can be used for the counter clearing or for values capturing The FMD bit in the control word acts as a switch of these functions If the entering edge appears on the CAP input up to the level which has been selected duri
213. nter 1 into VALB from the MD signal ENB 0 counter 1B stopped 1 counter 1B counts RESB 1 counter 1B reset and its clearing SETB 1 setting counter 1B to the SET value FCB O counter 1B runs free 1 clear counter 1B from the SET value gained MOD 0 period measuring 1 phase shift measuring IN1 INO selection of measured input for impulse length or period measurements input DIO 01 input DI1 input DI2 11 input DI3 CNT_OUT1 SET counter 1 preset CNT OUT2 counter outputs object 2 TCNTF_OUT structure CNT OUT2 CONT counter 2 control word 16times boolean type bit bit L 9 1 0 o o FG SET RES EN LT IT DER SETE RESB EN 0 counter 2 stopped 1 counter 2 counts RES 1 counter 2 reset and clearing SET 1 counter2 set to the value SET FC 0 counter 2 runs free 1 clear counter 2 from the SET value gained ENB 0 counter 2B stopped 1 counter 2B counts RESB 1 counter 2B reset and its clearing SETB 1 counter 2B set to the SET value FCB 0 counter 2B runs free 1 clear counter 2B from the SET value gained CNT OUT2 SET counter 2 preset The behaviour of individual data objects is described in the following chapter 44 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers 2 3 6 Initialization and behaviour of individual data objects of the IR 1055 IR 1057 boards The peripheral part of modules CP 1004 CP 1014 IR 1055 respectively IR 1057 boards cont
214. nter 2 control word 16x boolean type bit bit L0 o o O FC SET RES EN 7 6 5 4 3 2 4 0 L 9 3p 0 0 50 FOB I SETB H5 d4 adde d2 dE 0 9 8 EN 0 counter 2 stopped 1 counter 2 counts RES 1 counter 2 reset and clearing SET 1 counter 2 set to the SET value FC 0 counter 2 runs free 1 clear counter 2 after the SET value is gained ENB 0 counter 2B stopped 1 counter 2B counts 99 TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules IB 1301 module RESB 1 reset counter 2B and its clearing SETB 1 counter 2B set to the SET2 value FCB 0 counter 2B runs free 1 clear counter 2B after the SET2 value is gained CNT OUT2 SET counter 2 preset The behaviour of individual data objects is described in the following chapter 3 1 1 4 Initialization and behaviour of individual data objects of the IB 1301 module The IB 1301 peripheral module contains a block of binary inputs and outputs and two counter objects The panel intended for module parameters setting can be opened in the project manager in the node HW HW configuration Fig 3 1 6 In the folder External I O modules click on the amp icon on the relevant line Project manager PLC Address 0 Connection type Not connecte Select type of PLC series Foxtrot fet CPU Extem O modules Ester CIB Displays TXN 115 01 Common settings utogenerate config file Configuration can t be changed Suppres Hw
215. ntral unit is in operation HALT RUN modes A change of parameters using the push button is not possible all changes are done through the development environment After switching the PLC power supply on the push button has several functions during the launching sequence If we do not press the button during the launching sequence the PLC will launch one of its operation modes RUN HALT with an error etc If we press the button before the power supply is switched on and we keep it pressed for about 3s after the system has been started the central unit will launch the BOOT mode and await a change in firmware chapter 7 1 1 If we press the push button after the firmware version has been shown and we keep it pressed for about 3s the PLC will launch the HALT mode useful for cases when the user program running has a problem If we press the push button after the power supply is switched on for a short time before or during the firmware version is shown the PLC will offer a memory test That is indicated by lighting up the letter t on the display These tests are designated for maintenance purposes and upon unauthorized use the PLC memory can be erased completely Therefore if we incidentally get into this state we switch the PLC off and back on again For details see chapter 5 MODE button in CP 1014 CP 1015 modules Basic modules CP 1014 CP 1015 are equipped with seven push buttons Where six buttons under the display is desig
216. o FS 31500 If we want to filter the input analog value we switch the filtration mode on and set the time constant Measured values of the correspondent channel pass through the filter of the 1st grade The filter is due to the following relation _ Ya TTX Y t 1 x transferred value of the analog input y output Yi 1 last output c time constant of the 1st grade filter The value of the time constant is set within the range 0 1 25 0 s The filtration concerns all data formats of the channel given FS ENG and PCT and is accessible within all measuring ranges In following graphs and tables there are introduced transferred values for individual ranges of analog inputs 74 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Analog input 0 525 1 05 2 1 5 25 10 5 V 0 5 1 2 5 10 V 0 25 05 1 25 5V FS 50 15000 100 30000 105 31500 Fig 2 34 Current ranges of analog inputs of modules CP 1005 CP 1015 Table 2 39 Transferred values of analog inputs for O up to 10 V range Measured Variable value STAT FS ENG PCT 000C 31500 TT overflowing 10 5 V 0004 31500 mum s 0004 a 108 range range exceeding 0000 SOUUD 0000 nominal range OV 0000 Table 2 40 Transferred values of analog inputs for O up to 5 V range Measured Variable value STAT FS ENG PCT 000C 31500 aes TEs overflowing 5 55 V 0004 31500 mom 25 485 0004 5 108
217. og output AOI 1 1 0 O A8 AGND analogground 11 1 0 O A9 VREF reference voltage B1 B2 AIO analginputAlO S O B3 Alt analginputAl S B4 Al2 analginpttAI2 S O B5 AIS analginputAIS o O B7 Ab analginpttAlb o O B8 Ale analginputAl 3 4 1 1 Analog inputs Analog inputs are used for the connection of analog signals of the controlled object to the PLC The IT 1601 peripheral module contains 8 analog inputs AIO AI7 Inputs are universal independently configurable as voltage inputs current inputs and two wire connection of passive resistance sensors 125 TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules IT 1602 module Table 3 4 3 Basic parameters of analog inputs of the IT 1601 module Module type Number of inputs Number of inputs in group Galvanic isolation from internal circuits Diagnostics Joint conductor External power supply Type of converter Digital display resolution Protection type Insulation potentials at conditions Filtration normal operating Internal calibration Measuring range resolution 1 LSB voltage ranges current ranges passive thermal sensors resistance transmitters From IT 1601 module firmware version 1 6 IT 1601 8 8 yes Overload signalization in status word and by LED diode on the front panel minus none sigma delta 16 bits integrated surge guards none low pass filter digital comb filter
218. oject If we send the user program from Mosaic to the PLC then after the program is loaded the check of files for the Web server on the memory card in the PLC is undertaken and if any change in comparison with files saved on the PC is detected PLC files will be updated This automatic check can be switched off in the Project manager in the node SW File sending to the PLC where we disable the option Send newer files to the PLC automatically 5 8 INSTRUCTION FILE Central units of the FOXTROT PLC K series are equipped with the stack of 32 bit width They contain an instruction file which is when following certain conditions are kept compatible with other TECOMAT PLCs The instruction set contains the following items Data load and entry instructions with direct and indirect addressing logic operations of 1 8 16 and 32 bits widths Operations of counters timers shift registers Arithmetic instructions conversions and comparison of 8 16 and 32 bits width with without sign Limit functions value shift Organizational instructions and transfers in programs Conditional jumps according to comparison flags Table instructions above tables in the user memory which allow an optimal realization of complicated combinational and sequential functional blocks decoders time and sequential controllers sequential generators and they also facilitate the realization of diagnostic functions recognition of error states sequential recor
219. om inside circuits of the PLC and between the two groups themselves The excitation of the output is signalized by the lighting up of the relevant LED diode 34 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Table 2 25 Basic parameters of relay outputs Module type CP 1004 CP 1014 IR 1055 IR 1057 Number of inputs Number of groups x number of outputs in group Galvanic isolation from inside circuits Diagnostics Type of outputs Contact type Switching voltage Switching current Short term output overload Voltage flow through the joint connector Time of contact closure Time of contact opening Threshold limits of the load switched for resistant load DC13 for inductive load AC15 for inductive load Switching frequency without load Switching frequency with rated load Mechanical lifetime Electrical lifetime at max load for resistant load DC13 for inductive load AC15 for inductive load Short circuit protection Treatment of inductive load Insulation voltage among inputs and internal circuits 6 2x3 yes also between groups Signalization of output excitation on the panel Electromechanical relay non protected output switching max 250 V min 5 V max 3 A min 100 mA max 4A max 10A type 10 ms type 4 ms max 3 A at 30 V DC or 230 V AC max 3 Aat 30 V DC max 3 A at 230 V AC max 300 switches min max 20 switches min min 5 000 000 cycles min 100 000 cycles min 100 000 cycles min 100 00
220. onverters it is possible to create a random bus star branching by individual linear metallic lines interconnection via optical converters We must not forget that all metallic bus parts must be terminated at both ends the basic module has a built in terminator but all other modules do not The optical cable ensures a galvanic isolation therefore for the powering of the following module an independent power supply is vital Naturally we do not interconnect the ground of this source with the ground of sources supplying modules beyond the optical cable Three basic module connection types arise from the above mentioned 1 Modules are interconnected via the metallic cable including the power supply This is a standard method of interconnection suitable for sets with several modules in one distribution box This method is limited by the maximum bus length power supply cabling 2 Modules are interconnected via the metallic cable without the power supply This method is used in case of greater distances between modules the control system is distributed into several cases within the technology etc Each module or several modules together must then have their own power supply Any cable fulfilling RS 485 bus requirements can be used for interconnection of the TCL2 bus 3 Modules are interconnected via the optical cable This type of interconnection is intended for long distances Due to the fact that the lengths of individual segments ar
221. or panel desktops PanelMaker tool for working with PID regulators PIDMaker graphic on line analysis of monitored variables or offline analysis of archived data GraphMaker A part of the environment is also a ID 07 ID 08 ID 14 operation panel simulator and Ol 1073 integrated display simulator CP 1014 CP 1015 The environment contains the programming support according to the IEC 61131 3 standard in a structured text ST in instructions IL in the relay scheme language LD or in function blocks FBD 5 5 1 Configuration constants in the user program Configuration constants are generated automatically during the compilation of the user program and are integral part of it They carry information on the requested PLC mode and its use Constants can be set via menus of the MOSAIC development environment before the compilation itself is performed Project manager folder Sw Cpm fig 5 1 Default values are set after pressing the button Basic Configuration constants contain the following services PLC start after the switch on type of a restart after switching PLC power supply on It specifies whether the warm or cold restart will be performed chapter 5 4 4 By default cold restart is preset Protected tables specification of the user program backup range at EEPROM It is defined here whether the entire user program including T tables is backed up or whether T tables are opt out and remain in the original state at backed
222. ossible to activate the function of capturing short impulses on each input DIO to DI3 individually By ticking the option short impulses are detected we can activate the function of short impulses capturing for the relevant input If the option short impulses detected into 1 of the correspondent inputs is checked then the function of capturing short impulses into log 1 is activated otherwise the function of capturing short impulses into log 0 is activated If one of the options is not available it means that the relevant input is already occupied by a counter function If we have an input signal which is mainly in the log 1 state and impulses into log 0 occur within which are shorter then the longest possible PLC cycle period then a loss of such impulses can occur because only states of inputs appearing at the time of the central cycle turn are standardly transferred into the PLC If we switch the detection of short impulses for the log 0 state on then its changes are detected on the relevant input If the value log 0 appears on the input during a cycle then it will stay recorded in the module memory until the nearest data transfer to the central unit is undertaken even though the value log 1 is on the input at the time of the data transfer 121 TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules IR 1501 module The same applies by analogy for the input signal which is mainly in log 0 state and short log 1 impulses appear within If we switch the
223. ounter according to the mode according to the mode according to the mode according to the mode CNT_IN1 VALA first input value interpretation according to the counter mode udint type counter value 1 counter and IRC period during which the input is in log 1 state impulse length measurement period or phase shift period measuring CNT_IN1 VALB second input value interpretation according to the counter mode udint type counter value 1B pair of counters captured value counter and IRC with reset and capturing period during which the input is in log 0 state impulse length measurement CNT IN2 counter input object 2 TCNTF IN structure CNT IN2 SONT counter status word 2 16x boolean type 20 0 30 EPS 220 0 BG EV 9 bit Ni 6 5 4 3 2 A 0 bit 15 14 13 vue 11 10 9 Lr EV 1 active edge tag on DI2 according to the mode EG 1 active edge tag on DI3 according to the mode 118 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers EPS 1 achieved preset tag EVB 1 active edge tag on DI3 B counter EPSB 1 achieved preset tag B counter CNT_IN2 VALA counter value 2 udint type CNT_IN2 VALB counter value 2B pair of counters udint type Output data DO binary output values 8x boolean type DO7 DO6 DOS DO4 DOS DO2 DO1 DOO bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 xl 0 DOO DO7 relay outputs CNT OUT1 counter output object 1 TCNTF O
224. ounter is the same as the SET variable value then in the status word in the PS bit the log 1 during one PLC cycle will show as an achieved preset tag If the FC bit is set to log 1 in the control word the counter content will be automatically cleared The control word can also control the counters run EN bit reset the counter RES bit or set its content to a SET variable value entering edge of the SET bit 52 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers SCNT counter status word 0 0 0 PS 0 0 EG EV 7 6 ES 4 PS b 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 EV 1 entering edge tag on input UP EG 1 entering edge tag on input DOWN PS 1 achieved preset tag CCNT counter control word 0 0 0 0 FC SET RES EN 7 6 5 4 3 id 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 EN 0 counter stopped 1 counter counts RES 1 counter resetting and clearing SET 1 setting counter to SET variable value FC 0 counter free run 1 clearing the counter after variable SET value is gained Counter with controlled direction The counter object contains one two way counter of external events VALA variable equipped with a CLK input counter DIO or DI2 input for assessment of the direction of counting DIR DI1 or DI3 and a preset SET variable If the entering edge appears on the CLK input then providing that the DIR input has
225. pheral modules IT 1602 module Analog outputs are brought out to terminals in the ANALOG OUTPUTS array There is a schematic drawing of the overload connection to analog outputs in fig 3 4 16 a z AGI AGND ANALOG OUTPUTS Fig 3 4 16 Typical example of overload connection to analog outputs of the IT 1602 module 3 4 2 3 Data provided by the IT 1602 module The IT 1602 peripheral module provides information on inputs and outputs The data structure is apparent from the panel O Settings in the Mosaic development environment fig 3 4 17 icon 0 Items of the structure have assigned symbolic names which always start with r1 px characters where x is the number correspondent to the set address on the rotary switch In the column Full entry the concrete symbolic name for the given item is always stated If we want to use data in the user program we use either this symbolical name or in the column Alias we enter our own symbolic name which can then be used In no case do we use absolute operands since they can alter after the new compilation of the user program 146 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers lt gt 1 0 setting IEC Amo RM1 0 IB 1301 1 IR 1501 2 03 1401 3 IT 1601 4 IT pec era STAT TAIStat r1 p4 AIO STAT After me ry UNF BOOL dl rl p4 AIO STAT UNF After compil UNR BOOL dl rl p4 AIQ STAT UN
226. pital and small letters are not distinguished Substituting characters e g are not supported File path The file path determines the file location on the disc in relation to the ROOT directory Consequently the file path contains names of directories where the file is saved Same rules apply to the directory names as apply to file names Individual directory names in the path are separated by the slash The PLC file system supports absolute paths only Relative paths or even current directory change are not supported Maximum file name length including the path is limited to 65 characters 5 7 4 Memory card handling The slot for the memory card is accessible through the hole on the basic module left side In older basic modules that have not this hole yet the slot is accessible after the basic module case removal only and it is located on the middle board Memory card insertion After the memory card is inserted to the slot its automatic connection will take place immediately after the system power switch on It has no meaning to insert a card to the running system because it will not be connected Memory card removal The memory card can be removed from the shut down system only when we are sure that no entry on the card was in action during the system power switch off If the power failure occurs during the data entry on the card the currently opened file will not close and the file system is disturbed After the power switc
227. put relay contacts are brought out to terminals in the DIGITAL OUTPUTS array A schematic drawing of connections of loads powered by independent sources is shown in fig 3 3 3 Protection against overload and short circuit is undertaken using safety fuses for each input or for each group The rated voltage and type of fuse is selected for each load and character of load differently considering the maximum voltage and overload capacity of outputs or group of outputs For example when using tube fuses with a T and F fuse characteristic and a switching rate of 35 A it is possible to use a rated current of 3A per fuse per output and fuses of up to 10A when protecting a joint group conductor The principle of various ways how to undertake inductive load treatment support for RC anti interference members draft overview of anti interference items delivered by the PLC producer and other recommendations are stated in the Manual for designing of programmable logic controllers TECOMAT FOXTROT TXV 004 11 02 113 TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules IR 1501 module DIGITAL OUTPUTS come p00 Dot p02 O O Dos Do6 por __ o0 o Fig 3 3 3 Typical example of the switches connection to binary inputs of the IR 1501 module 3 3 1 3 Counters Binary inputs DIO DI3 can be used as counter inputs Two co
228. r PR a UR RERO DU LO SG A epa a Up Gn HDi b 104 3 2 1 1 Binary odtpUls 3 rit ota orn teat ota tat ata atat aste ats 105 3 2 1 2 Data provided by the OS 1401 module 107 3 2 1 3 Initialization and behaviour of individual data objects of the OS 1401 module 108 3 3 Combined modules of binary inputs and outputs ssssssssssssss 110 go TOT OO UC otto ears at oe ate actua fa pra uice fa ca a Roe Ded 110 3 3 1 1 Binary MpUIS 6 i 2s thet Ae eee eA thor Sf ete tiated 111 3 3 1 2 Relay OU PUTS cate bote En RAs lit tL ALLES EAT 112 3 3 1 3 COUTblSc uc EI LP LT OD ENPA LL LM C ee 114 3 3 1 4 Data provided by the IR 1501 module sssss 117 3 3 1 5 Initialization and behaviour of individual data objects of the IR 1501 module 120 3 4 Analog TodulBs scu cele ER EUER tebe a a ME 124 3 4 1 IT 1601 module oes ee ese E 124 3 4 1 1 Analog In Ets ce a oet ie e aha ake ake mb Eee 125 3 4 1 2 Analog outputs s cm eu Md du MM KM eMC LK TU rU 128 3 4 1 3 Data provided by the IT 1601 module esssssssss 129 3 4 1 4 Initialization and behaviour of individual data objects of the IT 1601 module 131 34 2 Mod le I 1602 uote ved vopkun veto vo top xo UI php Ox pU DR Ol 141 3 4 2 1 aate 1 6 1s MIA e10 LEA 142 3 4 2 2 Analog OUIDUIS isiro eaa eaa a ona eod oe credas 145 3 4 2 3 Data provided by the IT 1602 module sessssssss 146 3 4 2 4 Initializa
229. r causing data exchange impossible Sn 5 DEC module operation is declared 0 module is not operated by the user program 210 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers 1 module is operated by the user program Sn 6 OTH invalid type of module 0 module required by declaration is fitted in the position 1 another type of module than declared is fitted in the position Sn 7 POS occupied position 0 position is not occupied 1 module found on the position The content of the status register of the selected module is also available in the Mosaic development environment at the top part of the panel Setting V V or after selecting PLC HW configuration in the tag Aaditional information Examples of individual states of peripheral modules operation In the table 6 2 there are the most frequent states of peripheral modules operation and their indication in the status zone Table 6 2 Most frequent states of peripheral modules operation Status register Sn Status of peripheral module operation value position is not occupied operation off operated module does not communicate data invalid hot swap status operated module stopped communicating critical error reported data invalid hot swap status position is occupied operation off error occurred when trying to search for information on module module operation running data temporarily invalid communication runs trouble free a short term status during
230. r object which uses this input switched on simultaneously If such a situation occurs the function of capturing short impulses is switched off automatically 111 TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules IR 1501 module Table 3 3 3 Basic parameters of binary inputs of the IR 1501 module Number of inputs 4 Number of inputs in group 4 Galvanic isolation from internal circuits yes Diagnostics Signalization of excited input on panel Joint conductor minus plus Input voltage for log 0 UL max 5 V DC min 5 V DC for log 1 UH min 15 V DC type 24 V DC max 30 V DC Input current at log 1 type 10 mA Delay from log 0 to log 1 5 us Delay from log 1 to log 0 5 us Minimum width of the pulse captured 50 us Binary inputs are brought out to terminals in the DIGITAL INPUTS array You can see a schematic overview of the switchers connection in fig 3 3 2 COM1 DIGITAL INPUTS Fig 3 3 2 Typical example of the switches connecting to binary inputs of the IR 1501 module 3 3 1 2 Relay outputs Relay outputs serve to control two state action and signaling elements of the controlled object supplied by alternating or direct current of up to 250V Outputs are realized by a closing voltage free contact relay brought out to a group with one joint terminal The IR 1501 peripheral module contains 8 relay outputs DOO DO7 organized into a group with a joint terminal Outputs ha
231. r than the maximum value The instruction label number for call or jump is greater than the greatest number of the label used in the user program T table not declared The T table used in this instruction is not entered into the user program it must be added unknown instruction code The instruction used is not implemented in this central unit the range of the field or string is exceeded During an indirect addressing in the ST language the value of the index computed by the user program exceeded the size of the field or the string into which the index is directed stack range exceeding during indirect addressing 195 TXV 004 10 02 92 80 pcpcpc 92 CO pcpcpc 93 00 pcpcpc 93 40 pcpcpc 93 80 pcpcpc 93 CO pcpcpc 94 80 pcpcpc 95 00 pcpcpc 95 40 pcpcpc 6 Diagnostics and troubleshooting During the indirect addressing by means of instructions LDIB LDI LDIW LDIL LDIQ WRIB WRI WRIW WRIL and WRIQ the stack range was exceeded BP instruction nesting error The BP instruction cannot be used in processes P50 to P57 call of P5n debugging process in another process P5m the process for BP operation is not programmed The P5n debugging process called by the BP instruction is not programmed It must be added to the user program user program fault found during the current check System internal error DP cannot be set stack range exceeded SP cannot be set system stack range exceeded FP cannot be set s
232. ral module provides information on inputs and outputs The data structure is apparent from the panel O Settings in the Mosaic development environment fig 3 4 4 icon T Items of the structure have assigned symbolic names which always start with rf px characters where x is the number correspondent to the set address on the rotary switch In the column Full entry the concrete symbolic name for the given item is always stated If we 129 TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules IT 1602 module want to use data in the user program we use either this symbolical name or in the column Alias we enter our own symbolic name which can then be used In no case do we use absolute operands since they can alter after the new compilation of the user program gt 1 0 setting v d AMO RM1 0 IB 1301 E l IR 1501 2 05 140 em TAI E STAT TAlStat TI p3 AlUCSTAT UNF BOOL dl rl p3 AID STAT UNF 2146 0 UNR BOOL dl rl p3 AIU STAT UNR 2146 1 OVR BOOL dl rl p3 AID STAT OVR ZX146 2 OVF BOOL dl rl p3 AIO STAT OVF 2146 3 FLS BOOL dl rl p3 AIO STAT FLS 2146 4 CJC BOOL del rl p3 AID STAT CJC 2146 5 CHC B00L l 1_p3_Al0 STAT CHC 44147 0 FS INT del rl p3 AID FS ZXWH 48 ENG REAL ap rl p3 AIO ENG ZXF150 PCT REAL dl rl p3 AIO PCT AXF154 HAIN T I dl rl p3 Al X158 12 AI2 T I dl ri p3 Al2 24170 12 AI3 T I dl rl p3 Al3 25182 12 HAI4 TAI dl rl p3 l4 2x194 12 Al5 T I dl ri p3 Al5 4206 12 AIG T I dl rl p3
233. re saved on the card into the directory folder ROOT Within this folder other directories can be created by the user alone Files saved on the card outside of the directory ROOT are not visible in the Mosaic environment Furthermore the memory card is used by the Webmaker by the help of which web pages for the display of the PLC user program variables can be created These files are saved in the folder ROOT WWW Library FileLib functions used in the PLC user program enable data transfer between the memory card and the PLC notepad in both directions and other file operation The library is supplied as a part of the Mosaic environment installation from the version 2 6 0 Directories structure The root directory for file operations within the PLC is called ROOT The PLC programmer can work with those files and directories only that are located in the ROOT 188 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers directory Other files and directories are not accessible from the user program Consequently the ROOT directory is for the PLC programmer the current directory File names The file system support file names in the convention DOS 8 3 The file name consists of the file name itself max 8 characters and of the file name extension max 3 characters These two parts are separated by a dot No punctuation symbols spaces and symbols can be used in file names Characters of national alphabets are not supported in names Ca
234. retation of the measured value required The configuration of analog inputs can be found in the folder Analog inputs fig 3 4 19 The transferred value in the FS variable is an int type variable The value 0 corresponds to the minimum value of the input unipolar value and the value 31 500 corresponds to the maximum value It applies that 100 of the nominal range of the analog input corresponds to the value of FS 30000 The transferred value in the ENG variable is a real type variable and represents directly the value in engineering units according to the measuring range selected The transferred value in the PCT variable is a real type variable and represents the percentage relation between nominal and measured value of the analog input The PCT variable is related to the FS variable It applies that for the value FS 0 is the PCT 0 and for the value FS 30000 the PCT 100 The PCT variable can reach a maximum value of 105 which corresponds to FS 31500 If we want to filter the input analog value we switch the filtration mode on and set the time constant Measured values of the correspondent channel then go through the 1st grade filter The filter is due to the following relation 149 TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules IT 1602 module _ Yer TX T 1 x Converted value of the analog input y output yi 1 last output c time constant of the 1st grade filter The time constant value is set in the range
235. rflow protection error Data exchange via the system bus errors The reason is a high level of interference missing or non functional bus termination or a PLC fault initialization failed Data exchange via the system bus error The reason is a high level of interference missing or non functional bus termination or a PLC fault initialization table missing The initialization table necessary for the operation of all peripheral modules is missing It is necessary to verify the correctness of configuration setup of the corresponding peripheral module undertake a new compilation and load the repaired user program into the PLC again maximum size of variable exceeded The maximum size of the field type variable exceeded within the range of data exchanged with the peripheral module It is necessary to verify the correctness of configuration setup of the corresponding peripheral module undertake a new compilation and load the repaired user program into the PLC again 199 TXV 004 10 02 Ar pp 3402 Ar pp 3411 Ar pp 3412 Ar pp 3413 Ar pp 3414 Ar pp 3415 Ar pp 3421 Ar pp 3422 Ar pp 3423 Ar pp 3424 Ar pp 3425 Ar pp 3426 Ar pp 3427 Ar pp 3428 Ar pp 3429 Ar pp 3430 Ar pp 3431 Ar pp 3432 Ar pp 3433 Ar pp 3434 6 Diagnostics and troubleshooting incorrect notepad address Exceeded notepad range in the declaration of peripheral modules controlled by the expander an empty list of variables The list of variabl
236. ripheral module power supply is switched off There are shown transferred values for individual ranges of analog inputs in the following graphs and tables 150 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Analog input 0 105 1 05 ve 0 1 1V 0 OV 0 1 1V Binar 0 105 1 05 V us 28g B SS Dc S2 FS Co co Co c5 I ine o ow PCT oo oo TT Fig 3 4 20 Voltage ranges of analog inputs of the IT 1602 module Table 3 4 27 Transferred values of analog inputs for the range 0 to 1 V Measured Variable value STAT FS ENG PCT gt 1 05V 000C 31500 1 05 V 0004 31500 1 05 105 1 100 nominal range 0002 7 1 05V 0003 31500 Table 3 4 28 Transferred values of analog inputs for the range 0 to 0 1 V Measured Variable value STAT FS ENG PCT gt 0 105 V 000C 31500 0 105 range overflowing 0 105 V 0004 31500 0 105 105 ER 0 1 100 nominal range 0 1 0002 0 105 V 0002 31500 0 105 noe descended lt 0 105 V 0003 31500 0 105 105 range underflowing 151 TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules IT 1602 module J K RS B Analog input 1200 41372 1768 41820 41136 1301 1685 1749 495 586 859 410350 146 129 33 3210 Binary 250 200 50 4250 value mn 09 5 1500 0 50 15000 100 30000
237. ris tendernee ni bedna andrmu crude dn tdas 167 5 3 1 Basic modules CP 1004 CP 1005 sseesseeeen nennen nnn 167 5 3 2 Basic modules CP 1014 CP 1015 seeseeseeen enne nnn 168 5 4 PLC operationing modes etes re ee Aet e tUe t AE LE Md 173 5 4 1 Change of PLC operation modes sssssssseeneeee 177 5 4 2 Standardly performed activities during the PLC mode change 178 5 4 3 Optionally performed activities during the PLC mode change 178 5 4 4 User program restarts 2 2 4 2 nier a carte deber uer ur eg e genes 179 5 4 5 Change of the program while the PLC is in operation 179 5 5 Programming and debugging of the PLC program sssssessss 180 5 5 1 Configuration constants in the user program eeeeeesseese 181 5 5 2 PLC COMMUTATION ata tese toe op eoe pp opea tp beber 183 5 5 3 Project arehivation m the PLC urere esee ee oy cee Eee Ru eee Ee ure ducent 186 5 6 Testing of I O signals connected to the PLC seeeessssessssssss 188 5 7 File system and web SOIVB aen sedes Decet dataset uode enn eu adu eee es 188 5 7 1 Memory card harndlitig iode EHE treni e EH rette itte 189 5 42 Web Serve CLE 190 5 8 HSU TIORN TNS c c Mc et oL ec ee ae ee 190 6 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING eceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 192 6 1 Conditions for the corr
238. rs only In case of the TECOMAT FOXTROT system the user can change the firmware of the central unit itself that is saved in the file stated in the table 7 1 Systems have the IP address 192 168 134 176 preset from the producer This address is set even in a case when the integrity of the record of communication parameters in EEPROM of the central unit was disturbed Table 7 1 Names of files with the firmware for central units of the TECOMAT FOXTROT system home IP address set in production CP 1004 teco1004 tfw 192 168 134 176 CP 1005 teco1005 tfw 192 168 134 176 CP 1014 teco1014 tfw 192 168 134 176 CP 1015 teco1015 tfw 192 168 134 176 Central unit IP address setting If we need to change IP address we can use next procedure suitable mainly for basic modules CP 1004 and CP 1005 that are not equipped with built in display Ol 1073 and do not allow to set IP address directly using buttons on the module Switch system off and on again During power supply switching on hold button MODE pushed until CPU comes to BOOT mode On the display there are shown boot version and MAC address that is unique number given to the central unit for Ethernet access Copy this number and use it as parameter according to the following example Suppose that MAC address of the central unit is 00 0A 14 02 3F F1 and we request to set IP address 192 168 1 10 On the computer connected to Foxtrot system write to command line the following commands arp s 192 168
239. rs setup If we select this item the menu of central unit parameters that can be changed will appear parameters See eceta seni Cm sms P ae Cleclan ra exit I P mask gateway Using cursor keys we indicate by the cursor gt the required parameter and we press the button J The value of the parameter with the possibility of editing is invoked by this action Using buttons gt and we move the cursor and by buttons and we increase or decrease the digit value on the position indicated by the cursor By pressing the button J we return back to the menu Following parameters can be set IP addr IP address of the basic module IP mask IP mask of the basic module gateway IP address of the local network gate By selecting the item exit the termination of the setting mode will be required By pressing the button we accomplish the saving of the change parameters into the EEPROM central unit If we don not want to change parameters we press C The system will then proceed the reset and start the switching sequence according to table 5 2 BOOT mode special mode enabling the central unit firmware change chapter 7 1 1 test hw extended test of the central unit hardware for the service purposes 172 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers 5 4 PLC OPERATIONING MODES The FOXTROT PLC can be operated in several operating modes These are named RUN HALT and PROG Their indication is des
240. rve for control of analog action and signaling elements of the controlled object The IT 1602 peripheral module contains 2 analog outputs AOO and AO1 They are voltage bipolar 0 10V both have one joint terminal In terms of allowed overload of 105 95 it is possible to set the voltage of up to 410 5 V respectively 10 5 V on outputs Analog outputs are galvanically isolated from internal circuits Joint terminals of analog inputs analog outputs and reference voltage are interconnected Table 3 4 26 Basic parameters of analog outputs of the IT 1602 module Module type Number of outputs 2 Number of outputs in group 2 Output type active voltage output Galvanic isolation from internal circuits yes External supply none Transfer time 10 us Protection type integrated surge guards Insulation potentials at normal operating 500 V DC between output and internal conditions circuits Digital display resolution 10 bits Output range resolution 1 LSB 10 V to 10 V 21 074 mV Max output value 105 upper limits of output range Min output value 105 96 lower limits of output range Max allowed permanent overload without 14 V each terminal AO against damage AGND Max output current 10 mA Analog output error max error at 25 C 2 of full range thermal coefficient 0 3 of full range K linearity 0 7 96 of full range repeatability during steady conditions 0 5 96 of full range 145 TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peri
241. s communication speed cannot be used in the given mode of the serial channel station address collision At the MPC or PFB mode there is a subordinated station entered with the same address as the address of the superior station is One of these addresses must be changed In the CAN or PFB mode a station with an address outside the permitted range was entered invalid number of network participants in the mode MPC PLC or PFB invalid number of data blocks in the UPD mode The maximum number of network participants permitted in modes MPC PLC or PFB was exceeded The maximum number of data blocks offered by the submodule was exceeded in the UPD mode In the initialization the number of the data blocks must correspond to the type of submodule Also an invalid or illegible configuration record in the submodule can be a cause of this problem the number of network participants in the mode MPC PLC or PFB exceeds the number of lines 208 TXV 004 10 02 73 cc 3810 73 cc 3811 73 cc 3815 73 cc 4204 73 cc 4206 73 cc 4207 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Information on the number of participants does not correspond with data following in the initialization table This error is generated also by the number of network participants 1 or 0 Check the correctness of the content of the initialization table or use the configuration using the Mosaic development environment non permissible number of the local port In the
242. s not indicate data transfer The rest of LED diodes located on the right side of the front panel of CP 1004 modules indicate the excitation of inputs and outputs Furthermore these modules units are equipped with an unitary seven segment display Basic modules CP 1014 and CP 1015 have not LED diodes to indicate inputs and outputs nor do they have seven segment display Their function is executed by an integrated display Details are described in the chapter 2 5 Details on the central unit s behaviour are stated in chapter 5 16 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Table 2 5 Function overview of indication LEDs of the basic module Colour Behaviour Name Function o O RUN Green central unit is working user program is not executed HALT PROG mode flashing central unit is working user program is executed mode RUN Red on signalization of an error reported by the central unit ETHERNET signalization of Ethernet ETH1 interface activity on other Green indication of excitation of DI inputs and DO outputs CP 1004 CP 1005 only MODE button in CP 1004 CP 1005 modules Basic modules are equipped with one button which basic function is the displaying of the IP address IP mask of the Ethernet interface IP network gateway address and further of the setting of both serial channels All these information are displayed in the form of the rolling text during the time the button is pressed any time the ce
243. s not programmed user program fault during continuous check found DP cannot be set stack range exceeded SP cannot be set system stack range exceeded FP cannot be set system stack range exceeded unsupported function block maximum cycle time exceeded maximum time of interrupt process exceeded address error error of service byte hh invalid parameters of communication service ss acceptance area overflow protection error initialization failed initialization table missing maximum size of the variable is exceeded invalid address in working memory empty list of variables file with variables cannot be open error in the list of variables 221 TXV 004 10 02 Overview of errors Error code Error specification Ar pp 3414 Ar pp 3415 Ar pp 3421 Ar pp 3422 Ar pp 3423 Ar pp 3424 Ar pp 3425 Ar pp 3426 Ar pp 3427 Ar pp 3428 Ar pp 3429 Ar pp 3430 Ar pp 3431 Ar pp 3432 Ar pp 3433 Ar pp 3434 Ar pp 3700 Ar pp 3701 Ar pp 3803 Ar pp 3805 Ar pp 3806 Ar pp 3807 Ar pp 3808 Ar pp 3809 Ar pp 3813 Ar pp 3814 Ar pp 4301 Ar pp 4302 Ar pp 4303 Ar pp 4304 Ar pp 4401 Ar pp 4402 Ar pp 4403 Ar pp 4404 Ar pp 4502 Ar pp 4503 Ar pp 4504 Ar pp 50ss Ar pp 5103 Ar pp 52ss Ar pp 53ss Ar pp 54ss Ar pp 5501 Ar pp 6000 Ar pp 6001 Ar pp 6201 Ar pp 6202 Ar pp 6203 Ar pp 6204 Ar pp 6401 Ar pp 7005 Ar pp kkkk graphical display working zone is overcrowded number of screen got over declared maximum error at graphical
244. s switched to the active state it is necessary to base the calculations on the number of simultaneously activated inputs and outputs on the load and type of each output Performance losses on one input or on the PLC output in the active state rather can be found in table 4 4 and 4 5 162 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Table 4 4 Performance loss within one input Module type Rated current Performance loss per 1 input CP 1004 CP 1014 IR 1055 IR 1057 24 V DC CP 1005 CP 1015 IR 1056 24 V DC IB 1301 IR 1501 24 V DC AC PX 7811 PX 7812 24 V DC WoW 4 5 Performance loss within one Rated curent To per 1 output Bice 1401 24V Rial 2 A DOO DO3 0 30 W 0 5 A eae 0 10 W PX 7812 24 V DC 0 5 A 0 10 W PLC modules can be located in the case on each other In this case a minimum distance between upper and lower module surface of 90mm must be kept to ensure the air ventilation In cases that do not have a forced ventilation the mounting of the rack must be done so that the distance between the case top and the upper module surface is a minimum of 90 mm The distance between the bottom of the case and the lower module surface must be kept at minimum of 90 mm too The grounding terminal of the PLC must be connected in the shortest possible way to the main grounding terminal of the case via the conductor of the profile of min 2 5 mm according to the CSN 33 2000 5 54 The connection of the PLC supply and t
245. s to PLC Environment Documentation Basic selection of control system modular system compact system regulating system Select type of PLC series Brief description of unit CP 1004 CPM K 192kB 64kB RAM SCH ETH webserver integrated IO 8xDI 6xDO 4 TXN 110 04 CP 1005 CPM K 192kB 64kB RAM SCH ETH webserver integrated IO BxDI I 2x40 TXN 110 05 CP 1014 CPM K 192kB 64kB RAM SCH ETH webserver integrated ID 8xDI 6xDO 2 TXN 110 14 CP 1015 CPM K 192kB 64kB RAM SCH ETH webserver integrated IO 6xDI Al 2 AC TXN 110 15 Fig 5 2 PLC series selection Manual configuration of PLC You can configure the PLC manually if the concrete PLC unit is not physically available In the Central module Fig 5 3 folder we can change the type of the basic module by clicking the right mouse button in the column Module type We can then choose the requested module from the menu In the External I O modules Fig 5 4 folder we can add further peripheral modules by clicking the right mouse button on the selected place in the form in the column Module type We can then choose the requested module from the menu Its name appears at the required position of the form 183 TXV 004 10 02 5 PLC operation By clicking the left mouse button on the icon amp a panel opens allowing to configure the concrete module Detailed information on the possibilities of configuration can be found in related chapters
246. se Connection type Simulated PLC Common settings 2 Autogenerate config file Configuration can t be changed Suppress I0 modules Hw Basic selection of control system modular system compact system C regulating system Select type of PLC series Hw Configuration PLC Network logical connection Sw Select type of PLC series Environment Documentation PA CPU Brief description of unit Order number CP 1005 CPM K 192kB 64kB RAM SCH ETH webserver integrated IO 6xDI Al 2x40 6 00 TXN 110 05 CP 1014 CPM K 192kB 64kB RAM SCH ETH webserver integrated IO 8xDI 6 DO 4x41 IRC CNTR display 4x20 6 buttons TXN 11014 CP 1015 CPM K 192kB 64kB RAM SCH ETH webserver integrated IO 6xDI Al 2x40 6xDO display 4x20 6 buttons TXN 11015 Fig 2 1 PLC series selection Table 2 2 Basic parameters of basic modules Type of the central unit Power supply voltage SELV 24 VDC 25 15 Internal protection none Maximum input 8 W Connection screw fixed terminals max 2 5 mm of the conductor on the terminal connector RJ 45 Ethernet Galvanic separation of the power supply from none internal circuits Input number from which binary optional for counters from which binary optional analog Output relay number Analog output number User LCD display character number ENE NES d Number of user push buttons The number of additional binary inputs outputs 7 0
247. se among modes RUN HALT BOOT by setting parameters and hardware tests The selection is accomplished by pressing enter and then confirmed by another pressing of or cancelled by the push button C clear For details see chapter 2 5 and 5 2 1 2 Program memory and RTC power supply backup When switching the PLC power supply voltage off data in the user program memory and in the remnant zone of the notepad are backed up Backup is ensured by a Li lon battery The real time circuit and the calendar circuit RTC is backed up in the same way as the user program memory The battery does not need any maintenance Because it is sealed in the system an eventual replacement should be done by the producer When the battery is changed all data in the user program memory and in the remnant zone of the notepad are lost Therefore we recommend to backup the user program to the EEPROM memory Booster backup battery The Li lon battery has an effective life of backing up of 500 hours If from any reason do we need to extend the backing up period e g bypassing the period of company holiday when the power is off we can fit into the prepared holder the additional lithium battery of CR2032 type which after the Li ion battery is exhausted will start to supply the power and thus extend the backing up period up to 20 000 hours Consequently in case of single shift operation cycle the battery discharging does not occur not even during the weeke
248. sensor TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers 3 3 1 4 Data provided by the IR 1501 module The IB 1501 peripheral module provides information on inputs and outputs The data structure is apparent from the panel O Settings in the Mosaic development environment Fig 3 3 6 icon T0 Items in the structure have assigned symbolic names which for the IR 1055 board start always with r1 px characters where x is the number correspondent to the set address on the rotary switch In the column Bull entry the concrete symbolic name for the given item is always stated If we want to use data in the user program we use either this symbolical name or in the column Alias we enter our own symbolic name which can then be used In no case do we use absolute operands since they can alter after the new compilation of the user program lt gt 1 0 setting a IEC gt RMO Q RM1 0 IB 1301 1 m 1501 2 0s iam SDI STEP DIO BOOL ry fant ooo OD DI BOOL dl rl pi DI DI 2124 1 DI2 BOOL dl rl pi DI DI2 2124 2 DI3 BOOL dl rl pi DI DI3 2124 3 EDIP TBIN_4DIP ri_pi_DIP DIPO B00L E rn pi DIP DIPO DIP1 BOOL dr pi DIP DIP1 DIP2 BOOL Eri pl DIP DIP2 DIP3 BOOL Ul n pi DIP DIP3 EjENT IN1 TCNTF IN rl pl CNT IN1 SCNT UINT dl rl pi CNT INT7SCNT YALA UDINT dl rl pl CNT INT VALA RL128 VALB UDINT dl ri pi CNT INT VALB 324132 SENT IN2 TCNTF IN dl rl pi CNT IN2 8136 10 EDO TBIN 8DO rl pl DO DOO BOOL m r1 p1 DO D
249. ser program saving errors 80 01 0000 invalid map length of the user program at EEPROM 80 02 0000 invalid protection character CRC of the user program map at EEPROM 80 03 0000 invalid protection character CRC of the entire program at EEPROM 80 04 0000 no user program at EEPROM There is a fault at EEPROM memory or the user program is designated for another series of central units or it was not loaded into EEPROM at all It is necessary to load a new user program into EEPROM or disconnect the EEPROM memory and load the user program into RAM 193 TXV 004 10 02 80 05 0000 80 06 0000 80 07 0000 80 08 0000 80 09 0000 80 0A 0000 80 OB 0000 6 Diagnostics and troubleshooting invalid map length of the user program at RAM invalid protection character CRC of the user program map at RAM invalid protection character CRC of the entire program at RAM There is a memory fault or the user program is designated for another series of central units It is necessary to load a new user program into RAM editing intervention to the user program while EEPROM connected If the EPROM memory is connected its content is loaded into the RAM memory of the central unit after switching the system on The central unit checks the integrity of the program copy from EEPROM In case of editing intervention the error is reported at the moment of switching the PLC into the RUN mode If the editing intervention is contrived the EEPROM memory must be
250. set When resetting the PLC error the entire PLC error stack is reset including error stacks of peripheral modules The request on output blockage causes that the program will be executed with disconnected outputs only the signalization of output states on the LED diodes of the output modules will be active Output blocking is indicated by the OFF LED diode on peripheral modules and on basic modules CP 1014 and CP 1015 by the BLK abbrev on the display in the system mode of displaying Blank squares indicate output of the basic module to log 1 instead of full squares During outputs reset all PLC binary output units will be reset 178 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers 5 4 4 User program restarts Restart is an activity of the PLC the task of which is to prepare the PLC for execution of the user program Under normal conditions restart is executed at every change of the user program FOXTROT systems differentiate two types of restart warm and cold The warm restart enables to holdback values in the registers even during power supply is off remnant zone chapter 5 5 1 The cold restart always performs full memory initialization Activities during restart During restart the following activities are performed User program integrity test Reset of the entire PLC notepad Remnant zone reset cold restart only Setting of backed up registers warm restart only Initialization of system registers S Initiali
251. set the PLC to the defined initial state The table also explains the behaviour of the signalization LED diodes and of the display during the switching sequence Switching sequence termination The switching sequence can be terminated in three possible ways If everything is O K then after the switching sequence is terminated the PLC starts executing the user program and controlling the technology connected Should the PLC diagnostics evaluate a critical error during the switching sequence the PLC will stay in the HALT mode and signalize the error If we press the button after the firmware version is displayed and we hold it for about 3s the PLC will switch to the HALT mode where the user program is not executed PLC outputs stay locked and the PLC expects commands from the superior system The user program can be initiated either by the superior system or by switching the power supply off and on This function is useful when trouble occurs with the already running user program 5 3 2 Basic modules CP 1014 CP 1015 PLC operation after the power supply switch on Immediately after switching the power supply on the PLC performs activities shown in table 5 2 Further this state is called PLC switching sequence The purpose of the switching sequence is to test the PLC hardware and software and to set the PLC to the defined initial state The table also explains the behaviour of the signalization LED diodes and of the display during the switch
252. ss must always be 0 The ID 14 operator panel enables the installation of a short U bar where the basic module PLC FOXTROT can be fitted to A compact PLC with a display and keyboard is easily obtained by this method Detailed information on the ID 14 panel connection and its operation are described in the manual ID 14 operator panel TXV 002 33 01 156 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers 4 TRANSPORTATION STORAGE AND INSTALLATION OF PLCS 4 1 TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE The modules are packed according to internal packing instructions into cardboard boxes Basic documentation is enclosed in the packaging The external packaging is undertaken according to the order quantity and the method of transportation into a shipping container labeled and containing all necessary data for transportation The goods is transported from the producer s facilities as agreed when placing an order Transportation of the goods by the customer must be realized by covered transport means and in the position as is indicated on the packaging The shipping container must be fixed in such a way to avoid accidental spontaneous movement and damage of the external container During transportation and storage the product must not be exposed to direct climatic influences Transportation of the product is permitted within temperature range of 25 C to 70 and relative humidity of 10 to 95 withou t condensation The product must be stored only i
253. state of the object controlled 5 2 SETTING THE PLC IN OPERATION First PLC setting in operation procedure When setting the PLC in operation for the first time it is necessary to adhere to the following procedure a Check the connection of the network power supply of power supply modules b Check the connection of grounding terminals to the main grounding terminal of the switchgear or of the case c Check the mutual interconnection of PLC modules d Check whether the PLC configuration and module addressing corresponds to the application given e Check the correctness of the connection of PLC module power supply circuits violation of the prescribed power supply voltage parameters can cause the destruction of input or output circuits Switch the PLC power supply on The power supply of all modules must be switched on either at once or in the following sequence first the power supply of peripheral modules in the random order eventually CP 100x basic modules must be switched on Any other procedure is not permitted f lt Signalization of the PLC activity after switching the power supply on Inputs are blocked after the PLC is switched on This is indicated by the LED diodes OFF on the peripheral modules If after switching the power supply on the indication of blocking of some inputs or outputs lights up on some input or output modules for a short period of time it is not a problem since after switchi
254. t the end of metallic line If it is placed at the end of metallic line KB 0290 termination element must be used everytime Modules are interconnected via a duplex glass optical cable with two fibres one for each direction of transfer 62 5 125 um or 50 125 um on a distance of up to1750 m Eventually it is possible to use two single fibre optical cables Parameters of modules are stated in table 4 2 The TXN 105 52 set always contains two modules for connection of duplex optical cables Fig 4 1 Optical interconnection module KB 0552 160 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Table 4 2 Basic parameters of the modules optical interconnection of the bus KB 0552 Module type Product standard CSN EN 61131 2 Electric item protection level CSN 33 0600 Connection Screw type terminals Duplex 2xST Power supply 24V DC Power input 1 2W Frequency length of optical device 820 nm Operation temperature 0 to 55 C Minimum bridgeable attenuation min 8 dB type 15 dB Average lifetime at environmental temperature 55T 3 33 years dB performance Average lifetime at environmental temperature 40 3 68 years dB performance Transceiver symbol min e Transceiver optical performance at 25 10 0 Total optical performance 0 355 mW Receiver Symbol min Wee Input optical performance log 0 O upto 70 Prima 240 100 Input optical performance og a256 Pama 4
255. tandardly performed activities during the PLC mode change Switching from HALT to RUN When switching from the HALT to the RUN mode the following activities are executed e User program integrity test e Software configuration of peripheral units test that is stated in the user program chapter 5 5 2 e User program execution starts Switching from RUN to HALT When switching from the RUN the HALT mode the following activities are executed e The execution of the user program is stopped e Blockage disconnection of PLC outputs If during the change from one operating mode to the other a critical error occurs the PLC sets the HALT mode indicates the error on the central unit display and waits for the error cause deletion Warning Control suspension using the HALT mode is designated for PLC program debugging purposes only This feature does not replace the CENTRAL STOP function in any way CENTRAL STOP circuits must be connected in such a way that their function is independent of the PLC work 5 4 3 Optionally performed activities during the PLC mode change Options during state transition from HALT to RUN When switching from HALT to RUN the following activities are optional e PLC error reset e Warm or cold restart e Output blocking during the user program execution Options during state transition from RUN to HALT When switching from RUN to HALT the following activities are optional e PLC error reset e PLC outputs re
256. te green 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Note The RD and TD signal connection options depend on the cable used direct or crossed The colour of the conductor enables exact identification of the signal 31 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT basic modules CP 10x4 module IR 1055 IR 1057 peripheries 2 3 PERIPHERAL PART OF MODULES CP 1004 CP 1014 Peripheral part of modules CP 1004 CP 1014 constitutes of IR 1057 older variant IR 1055 board containing 8 multipurpose inputs and 6 relay outputs The first four inputs DIO DI3 can be used as common binary inputs or as inputs for sequencers Other four inputs DI4 DI7 can be used as common binary inputs or as analog inputs AIO AI3 Under the name IR 1057 respectively IR 1055 the processor operating these inputs and outputs presents itself within the system bus Ai A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 AB A9 B B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 Sollee GU PS e e ae atals lala keles laala 3 3 a E E amp iS m QO A a Qa jatjatjatiac TC LINE 24V CI BUS CH1 RS 232 DIGITAL SPECIAL INPUTS DIGITAL ANALOG INPUTS J Eexerpoas O0 eoeooooo000 V Foxtrot RUN ERROR CP 1004 ETHERNET MODE CH2 OPTIONAL SUBMODULE e g RS 232 RS 485 DIGITAL OUTPUTS Ss elo os Ela lail amp a Salala z s amp Oolalal s coNEcCU BN e l S rs5 alor E EE el fale gale e Cl C2
257. tems is in particular the possibility of autonomous control even during the centre failure gradual initiation of the whole system easier debugging additions cost savings and labour saving during the installation e g cabling control boards Programming device A PC can be used as a programming device The computer configuration must be selected according to the software features Mosaic Reliance The TECOMAT FOXTROT offers a number of useful system services that makes the programming more simple and user friendly An example can be a wide range of time data current date and time displayed or system support of the states handling while switching on the PLC power supply 1 3 TECOMAT FOXTROT SET The smallest fully functional assembly PLC FOXTROT is formed by a central module containing the central unit and various combinations of number and types of inputs and outputs and in some versions also the inbuilt display 4 x 20 characters and 6 push buttons table 2 1 The basic module can be expanded by connecting of up to ten peripheral modules table 3 1 Individual modules are connected to the basic module via the TCL2 bus The bus interconnected via metallic cables agrees with the RS 485 interface and must be closed on 7 TXV 004 10 02 1 Introduction to the TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers both ends The basic module contains the bus termination and must always be placed at its end The bus must be on its other end conn
258. tems rules for addressing according to the table7 2 apply Table 7 2 Rules for module addressing of TECOMAT FOXTROT system el parameter parameter CP 1014 CP 1015 OIHO78 oit073 w O 1 CP 1004 CP 1005 ERE wem mme o CP 1004 CP 1014 IR 1055 ir0555w 0o 3 CP 1005 CP 1015 IR 1056 irib6tw 0 3 I D14 idiw address 8 to 11 address address address address address address 1 line O mi2 02m tfw Here is to be noticed that parts of the basic module have the Rack value always 0 and the Position value is fixed according to the component type Peripheral modules have the Rack value always 1 and the Position value corresponds to the value set on the rotary address switch Panels ID 14 have the Hack value always 0 and the Position value is given by the panel address setting within the range 8 to 11 External master modules of the CIB bus contain two processors The Hack value must be 3 and the Position value corresponds to the value set on the rotary address switch for the processor operating the line 0 For the processor operating the line 1 the Position value higher by 1 is set The name of the firmware file is chosen according to the table 7 2 Files taw can be located in the folder firmware that is located in the same folder as the file flasher exe or they can be located in the same folder as flasher exe EM p sp 7 ir 7 irc IR
259. tering edge appears on the UP input the counter A increases its content by 1 and in the status word in the EV bit the log 1 during one PLC cycle will show as an entering edge tag on the input If the resultant content of the counter A is the same as the SET variable value then in the status word in the PS bit the log 1 during one PLC cycle will show as an achieved preset tag If simultaneously the FC bit is set to log 1 in the control word the counter content will be reset automatically If by analogy the entering edge appears on the UPB input the counter B increases its content by 1 and in the status word in the EVB bit the log 1 during one PLC cycle will show as the entering edge tag If the resultant content of the counter B is the same as the 51 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT basic modules CP 10x4 module IR 1055 IR 1057 peripheries SET variable value then in the status word in the PSB bit the log 1 during one PLC cycle will show as an achieved preset tag If the FCB bit is set to log 1 in the control word the counter content will be reset automatically The control word can also control the counters run EN and ENB bit reset the counter RES and RESB bit or set their content to a SET variable value SET and SETB bit The SET variable is common to both counters however it is possible to change it whenever during the operation SCNT counter status word
260. terminal Al against damage AGND Total time of the system input transfer type 65 ms Sample repeating time type 500 ms Overload signalization in status word and LED diode on the front panel Input disconnection detection in status word and LED diode on the front panel range nonfulfilment only range 4 20 mA Table 3 4 6 Basic parameters of input ranges for passive resistance sensors when using the supplied resistor 7k5 Module type Reference voltage 10V Analog input error max error at 25 C 0 5 of full range thermal coefficient 0 05 of full range K non linearity 0 09 of full range repeatability at steady conditions 0 07 of full range Max allowed permanent overload without 35 V each terminal Al against AGND damage Total time of the system input transfer type 70 ms Sample repeating time type 600 ms Overload signalization in status word and LED diode on the front panel Input disconnection detection none Max allowed permanent overload without in status word and LED diode on the damage front panel range exceeding 3 4 1 2 Analog outputs Analog outputs serve for control of analog action and signaling elements of the controlled object The IT 1601 peripheral module contains 2 analog outputs AOO and AO1 They are voltage outputs 0 10V both have one joint terminal In terms of allowed overload of 105 it is possible to se the voltage of up to 10 5 V on outputs Analog outputs are galvanically isolated
261. tervention into the user program with EEPROM connected program is compiled for another series of central units attempt to program the switched off EEPROM EEPROM programming failed RTC failure incorrect T table configuration identification error record cannot be read identification error no record identification error invalid record length identification error invalid record data communication with RTC error serial channel initialization table length is invalid non existing auxiliary table invalid speed in initialization table of serial channel station address collision invalid number of network participants number of network participants exceeds the number of lines non permissible number of local port unknown Ethernet interface protocol serial channel is not in required mode maximum volume of transmitted data within network or for participant exceeded serial channel cannot be assigned permanently occupied by another module non permissible mode of communication channel serial channel initialization table length is invalid return address stack overflow return address stack underflow non zero stack of return addresses after process termination label not declared label number is higher than the maximum value T table is not declared unknown instruction code the range of the field or string is exceeded stack range exceeding with indirect addressing error of nesting of instructions BP process for BP operation i
262. the chapter below 3 2 1 3 Initialization and behaviour of individual data objects of the OS 1401 module The OS 1401 peripheral module contains a block of binary outputs The panel for the module parameters setting can be opened from the project manager on the relevant line 108 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Connection type Not connecte Select type of PLC series F oxtrot h ow CPU Extern 1 0 modules Extem CIB Displays TXN 115 01 Project manager l Common settings utogenerate config file C Configuration can t be changed Suppres Hw Configuration Environment Mode woe Name Verion Order number Z TXN 11401 PLC Address 0 IE EEEE PLC Network logical conr Documentation TXN 113 01 TXN 116 01 SA Accessories Fig 3 2 4 Configuration of peripheral modules Binary outputs The binary outputs state is contained in the DO variable Configuration of binary outputs can be found in the folder Binary IO Fig 3 2 5 By ticking the option Switch on of the transfer of binary outputs DOO to DO7 we can enable the transfer of current states of the first eight outputs into the PLC notepad By ticking the option Switch on of the transfer of binary inputs DO8 to DO11 we can enable the transfer of current states of the four remaining outputs into the PLC notepad If this option is not ticked relevant values are not transferred and relevant outputs are not set Module settings OS 1401
263. the correctness of modifications being made on line The PLC central unit together with the Mosaic development environment ensures safe execution of these changes at one time so that the continuity of control is not threatened To explain the basic principle let us use the following example Let us assume that the FOXTROT PLC controls a technology which shut down would mean a very high economic loss e g a calciner and the programmer was ordered to make changes to the PLC program used It is not important at this moment whether it is a correction of an incorrect 179 TXV 004 10 02 5 PLC operation control algorithm or addition of a new function e g baking of a new product It is necessary to make changes to the PLC program and the calciner working must not be stopped The on line change of the program can be a solution to this situation The programmer performs the corresponding changes of the PLC program and the central unit ensures swapping from the old program to the new one in such a way that the n th cycle of computation is fully executed according to the original program and the following cycle will be performed according to the new program The central unit also ensures necessary activities connected with the changes of variables in such a way that the continuity of control is not affected The on line change of the program can be enabled in the Mosaic development environment in the Project manager in the folder Environment PLC Contro
264. tialization intended for another type In the hardware configuration such module operation is set that does not exist in a real unit Set the configuration in compliance with the reality either manually or by loading the data from the PLC invalid address higher than the maximum possible In the hardware configuration the module operation is set outside the possible addressable range Set the configuration in compliance with the reality either manually or by loading the data from the PLC 202 TXV 004 10 02 Ar pp 4304 Ar pp 4401 Ar pp 4402 Ar pp 4403 Ar pp 4404 Ar pp 4502 Ar pp 4503 Ar pp 4504 Ar pp 50ss Ar pp 5103 Ar pp 52ss Ar pp 53ss Ar pp 54ss Ar pp 5501 Ar pp 6000 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers module with an unknown operation In the hardware configuration is set an operation of the module which the central unit is not able to communicate with Set the configuration in compliance with the reality either manually or by loading the data from the PLC module identification reading error the record cannot be read module identification reading error no record module identification reading error invalid record length module identification reading error invalid record data Reading of the identification record of the peripheral module failed The repair by a specialist is necessary to be done hw module configuration error no data for configuration hw module configuration error invalid
265. tion and behaviour of individual data objects of the IT 1602 module 149 9 5 Speca MODUS oio es ae ele ere eid o eR al eee ER e cece 156 3 5 1 CIB MI2 02 external master DUS ccceeeeeceeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeees 156 3 5 2 ID 14 operator panel execs occ esee ettet EH teeter pre rte ena recent 156 TRANSPORTATION STORAGE AND INSTALLATION OF PLCS 157 4 1 Transportation and storage e c o Eee aen i Rhe eee n reo ned ro tx Res 157 2 25 SUNY OP PEG ee exta d eus ee an 157 4 3 System assembly ud thee th elt te dete tee bait sutil chius 157 4 3 1 Interconnection of individual modules sseeesseseesess 157 4 3 2 Optical interconnection of peripheral modules ssssssessss 159 4 4 PEC installati n ee TE 162 4 5 Power supply requirements iss decies cei edite dite dete E tede acces hee aede tested ea 164 4 51 EG DOWOISUDDD uides oar ot So potare andit ated ar dares eft edm ei epdC 164 4 5 2 Power supply of input and output circuits 165 3 TXV 004 10 02 Content 406 Seral COMMUNICATION stu cepa ri ete costituiti sth ues t tala 165 5 PEG ORE RA RIO sins editus dtu etis teste tutus detecta dd dae A RE 166 5 1 Instructions for safe operation ici eto see E eet deu ieee ER p ENDURO Orden rud 166 5 2 Setting the PLC in operation seeessesssssssseeeeeeeeeeeenn nnne 166 5 3 PLC switching sequence ui ineunte decmc cete
266. tion of short impulses bit bit 97 TXV 004 10 02 CNT IN1 CNT IN1 CNT_IN1 CNT_IN1 CNT_IN2 CNT_IN2 CNT_IN2 CNT_IN2 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules IB 1301 module counter input object 1 TCNTF IN structure SONT counter status word 1 16x boolean type o o 0 EPS EMD ENI EG EV bit Jf 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 o o EPSB o o o EVB bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 EV 1 active edge tag on DIO according to the mode EG 1 active edge tag on DI1 according to the mode ENI 1 active edge tag on DI2 according to the mode EMD 1 active edge tag on DI3 according to the mode EPS 1 achieved preset tag EVB 1 active edge tag on DI1 B counter EPSB 1 achieved preset tag B counter VALA first input value interpretation according to the counter mode udint type counter value 1 counter and IRC period during which the input is in log 1 state impulse length measurement period or phase shift period measuring VALB second input value interpretation according to the counter mode udint type counter value 1B pair of counters captured value counter and IRC with reset and capturing period during which the input is in log 0 state impulse length measurement counter inputs object 2 TCNTF_IN structure SCNT counter status word 2 16x boolean type bit i 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EV 1 active edge tag on DI2 according to the mo
267. to 1 short impulses detected DI2 DI2 short impulses detected into 1 short impulses detected DI3 DI3 short impulses detected into 1 iw Enable binary inputs carry from DIO to DI w Enable binary outputs carry from DOO to DO Enable ignore module error OK x Cancel Help Fig 2 18 Configuration of binary inputs and outputs If we check an item Enable ignore module error at the bottom side of H 1057 Module settings pane CPU doesn t stop user program performing even when the fatal error of data exchange with this module occurs but it tries to reinitialise the module and renew the communication The actual module status and the validity of data can be found in peripheral system status zone chap 6 5 Configuration of binary inputs is located in the folder Binary IO Fig 2 18 By ticking the option Switch on of transfer of binary inputs DIO to DI7 we can enable the transfer of current states of all eight inputs into the PLC notepad If this option is not ticked the relevant values are not transferred into the PLC notepad This option has no influence on inputs configuration Individual inputs DI4 DI7 behave as binary only when they are not used as analog inputs AIO AI3 in the folder Analog inputs the channel with the corresponding number is not ticked It is possible to activate the function of short impulses capturing within each input DIO to DI3 individually By ticking the option short impulses are detected we can a
268. to set the mode required by this submodule maximum volume of data transmitted within network or participant exceeded The specified volume of data transmitted within the network in modes MPC and PLC exceeded the maximum value One network allows transmission of data with a total volume of approx 32 KB A second reason of this fault can be that the specified volume of data transmitted with one participant exceeded the maximum value For other modes the specified volume of data transmitted exceeded the maximum size which the communication submodule is able to transmit within some data areas serial channel cannot be assigned permanently occupied by another module 209 TXV 004 10 02 6 Diagnostics and troubleshooting The number of the serial channel that we want to assign to the serial channel is already occupied 73 cc 4208 non permissible mode of communication channel The required mode cannot be set on this communication channel The reasons can be as follows the required communication channel does not support the required mode the selected communication channel is fitted with a submodule that does not support the required mode the required communication channel is not fitted with a submodule supporting the required mode Please check the correctness of the submodule fitted in the channel or select another mode or use another communication channel 6 5 PERIPHERAL SYSTEM STATUS ZONE Registers S100 to S227 conta
269. ts CP 1005 CP 1015 provide data regarding the serial communication ETH1 CH1 CH2 interface Details are to be found in the manual Serial communication PLC TECOMAT model 32 bits TXV 004 03 01 The peripheral part of the module the IR 1055 board provides information on inputs and outputs The structure of data is shown in the panel O Settings in the Mosaic development environment Fig 2 30 icon Wa Items in the structure have assigned symbolical names which for the IR 1055 board start with rO p3 In the column Full entry the concrete symbolical name for the given item is always stated If we want to use data in the user program we use either the symbolical name or in the column Alias we enter our own symbolical name which can then be used In no case do we use absolute operands since they can alter after the new compilation of the user program 69 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT CP 101x module display Ol 1073 lt gt 1 0 setting os do oo DEC EXP HEX BIN STR 0 cP 1005 2 mr2 01M 3 TR 1056 SDI TBIN_ EDI 30p3DI is M E EE E DIO B00L dk 0 p3 DI DIO B4 410 0 DI B00L dy 0 p3 DI DI1 B5 2641011 DI2 BDDL dy 0 p3 DI DI2 B6 210 2 DIZ BOOL dy r0 p3 DI DI3 B7 2410 3 DI4 BDDL dy i0 p3 DI DIM B8 304104 DI5 BDOL d i0 p3 DI DIS Bg 2 105 BAIO TAI 10 p3 AIO B4 STAT TAlStat 10_p3_Al0 STAT UNF BOOL dk 10_p3_AlO STAT UNF 2332 0 UNR BDOOL dy 10_p3_AlO STAT UNR 204321 OVR BODL dy
270. tted data within the network or for a participant exceeded serial channel cannot be assigned permanently occupied by another module non permissible mode of communication channel 220 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Error code Error specification 80 01 0000 80 02 0000 80 03 0000 80 04 0000 80 05 0000 80 06 0000 80 07 0000 80 08 0000 80 09 0000 80 0A 0000 80 OB 0000 80 0C 0000 80 1B tttt 80 44 0001 80 44 0002 80 44 0003 80 44 0004 80 45 0000 83 cc 3701 83 cc 3702 83 cc 3801 83 cc 3802 83 cc 3803 83 cc 3804 83 cc 3810 83 cc 3811 83 cc 3815 83 cc 4204 83 cc 4206 83 cc 4207 83 cc 4208 90 00 pcpcpc 90 40 pcpcpc 90 80 pcpcpc 91 00 pcpcpc 91 40 pcpcpc 91 80 pcpcpc 91 CO pcpcpc 92 00 pcpcpc 92 40 pcpcpc 92 80 pcpcpc 92 CO pcpcpc 93 00 pcpcpc 93 40 pcpcpc 93 80 pcpcpc 93 CO pcpcpc 94 80 pcpcpc 95 00 pcpcpc 95 40 pcpcpc Ar pp 1200 Ar pp 15hh Ar pp 16ss Ar pp 1705 Ar pp 1809 Ar pp 3100 Ar pp 3101 Ar pp 3401 Ar pp 3402 Ar pp 3411 Ar pp 3412 Ar pp 3413 invalid length of the map of the user program at EEPROM invalid protection character CRC of the map of the user program at EEPROM invalid protection character CRC of the entire program at EEPROM no user program at EEPROM invalid length of the map of the user program at RAM invalid protection character CRC of the map of the user program at RAM invalid protection character CRC of the entire program at RAM editing in
271. ture is useful when servicing the system and connected technologies when we have access to the source files of the user program which the central unit works with In this manner we can avoid problems when after several years application source files cannot be found or it is not obvious which version is uploaded in the central unit The whole project is saved in the central unit as a zip file protected with a password The complete process of archivation and restoring is done in the Mosaic environment Project archivation Choose the item File Archivation Archivation of the project to the PLC in the menu in the Mosaic environment which will open the panel Archive project group into the PLC Fig 5 6 Archive project to PLC 33 files added Additional infotmation D MosaicApp Foxtrot_manual 1 Foxtrot manual Plel PLCI PGA archived bmp Foxtrot_manual hwnx Foxtrot_manual cfg Foxtrot_manual hwn Archive with source code all connected PLC Password settings Password za Password confirmatior Make and save backup to PLC X Cancel Help Fig 5 6 Archiving a project into the PLC 186 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers The left field shows a tree of archived files We can enter a random text into the right field to describe the archived project All files of the actual project are saved in the central unit If we select the option Archive including source codes of connected PLCs then
272. type of on line change 207 TXV 004 10 02 70 C5rrpp 70 C6rrpp 73 cc 3701 73 cc 3702 73 cc 3801 73 cc 3802 73 cc 3803 73 cc 3804 6 Diagnostics and troubleshooting The module does not enable to change required parameters in running This situation can be generally superseded by the module firmware update chapter7 1 2 communication channel number error Attempt of initialization of the communication channel that is not accessible in this module Check the correctness of communication channels configuration communication channel mode error Attempt of initialization of the communication channel that is not accessible in this module Check the correctness of communication channels configuration invalid length of initialization table of communication channel The initialization table is either damaged or is designed for another channel mode or another type or version of module Please check the correctness of the configuration setting of the corresponding communication channel undertake a new compilation and load the corrected user program to the PLC again non existing auxiliary table The auxiliary table that the initialization table refers to does not exist The table must be declared a new compilation must be made and the corrected user program must be loaded to the PLC again Auxiliary tables are used for example in the PFB mode invalid speed in the initialization table of serial channel Thi
273. ulse length measuring and period and phase shift measuring are designated for periodic signals only These measurements are loaded with a libe error arising during the occupance of the periphery processor while exchanging data with the central unit This error is eliminated so that the resultant value of the measurement is gained as an average of the last eight pulses captured Therefore it is supposed that the signal detected is represented by pulses repeating with a certain period The absolute error of the measurement is max 10 us and decrease in relation to the PLC cycle extension The meaning of each function are described in detail in chapter 2 3 6 Counter inputs are connected in the same manner as standard inputs as shown in fig 3 3 2 In fig 3 3 4 and 3 3 5 examples of the IRC position sensors connection can be seen 115 TXV 004 10 02 3 PLC FOXTROT peripheral modules IR 1501 module IRC1 IRC2 V Q V G e fo 24V U CP A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 AT A8 8e8e8ee8 88 8 8 AQ o o a o No a a DIGITAL INPUTS IRC V G NI e T FK N 24V U Es A l L4 e Fig 3 3 4 Example of two IRC position sensors connection measurement point input A1 A4 A5 AT A8 A9 88e8eee ee 116 Fig 3 3 5 Example of complete connection of IRC position
274. ultipurpose It can be used for the counter clearing or for values capturing The FMD bit in the control word acts as a switch of these functions If the entering edge appears on the CAP input up to the level which has been selected during the configuration as active the current counter content will be copied into the VALB variable providing that in the control word MD and FMD bits are set to log 1 If the entering edge appears on the CAP input up to the level which has been selected during the configuration as active the content will be cleared by a single application providing that in the control word the MD bit is set to log 1 and the FMD bit is set log 0 The control word can also control the counter run EN bit reset the counter RES bit or set its content to a SET variable value SET bit SCNT counter status word 0 0 0 PS EMD ENI 0 EV 7 6 ES 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 EV 1 entering edge tag on input CLK ENI 1 active edge tag on input CLR EMD 1 active edge tag on input CAP PS 1 achieved preset tag CCNT counter control word 0 FMD MD NI FC SET RES EN u 6 ES 4 53 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 EN 0 counter stopped 56 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers 1 counter counts RES 1 counter resetting and clearing SET 1 setting counter to the SET variable
275. unication channel does not support the required mode the selected communication channel is fitted with a submodule that does not support the required mode the selected communication channel is not fitted with a submodule supporting the required mode Please check the correctness of the submodule fitted in the channel or select another mode or use another communication channel 198 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers 6 3 3 Peripheral system errors The errors are reported by the central unit that operates the peripheral module where the error occurred Numerical codes are in hexadecimal form and are reported by the central unit in the main error stack The r character represents group of modules the pp character represents the module address see table 6 1 Table 6 1 Meaning of characters r and pp in the error description pp group of modules Ar pp 1200 Ar pp 15hh Ar pp 16ss Ar pp 1705 Ar pp 1809 Ar pp 3100 Ar pp 3101 Ar pp 3401 basic module in built display Ol 1073 basic module internal master bus CIB MI2 01 basic module peripheral part IR 105x operating panel ID 14 standard peripheral module external master bus CIB MI2 02 even addresses line 0 uneven addresses line 1 communication service of the bus was designated to all modules simultaneously address error error of service byte hh invalid parameters of communication service ss receiving zone ove
276. unter objects are available working in several modes one way counter two way counter basic IRC Every counter object standardly uses two inputs The first counter object enables modes that use all four inputs counter and IRC with reset and capturing impulse length measuring period and phase shift measuring In this case the second counter object is switched off Even when used for these alternative functions inputs DIO DI3 are still useable as standard binary inputs Inputs are brought out to terminals in the DIGITAL INPUTS array Input electric parameters can be found in the table 3 3 3 time parameters in the table 3 3 5 and an overview of modes in 3 3 6 Table 3 3 5 Time parameters of counter inputs of the IR 1501 module Module type IR 4500 Input frequency 5 kHz Pulse width min 50 us Delay from log 0 to log 1 5 us Delay from log 1 to log 0 5 us Hegisters range 0 to 4 294 967 295 32 bits Symmetric signal frequency V G 1 25 kHz Pulse width V G NI MD min 50 us Delay from log 0 to log 1 5 us Delay from log 1 to log 0 5 us Registers range 0 to 4 294 967 295 32 bits Pulse length measuring period and phase shift measuring Input frequency 0 1 to5000 Hz Pulse width 50 to 10 000 000 us 114 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Table 3 3 6 Overview of counter modes Counter mode Counter object 1 Counter object 2 signal Pig DI1 DI2 DI3 DI2
277. up analog input Aln value int type The minimum input value matches the value 0 the maximum value matches 31500 by which it is valid that 10096 of the nominal range of the analog input matches the value FS 30000 Aln analog input value real type Value of measured quantity in engineering units Aln analog input value real type The percentage relation between the measured and the nominal value of the analog input For the value FS 0 applies the value of PCT 0 and for the value FS 30000 the value PCT 100 analog inputs objects AOO AO1 TAO_TC6 structure AOn analog input value int type The minimum input value matches the value 0 the maximum value matches 31500 by which it is valid that 10096 of the nominal range of the analog input matches the value FS 30000 AOn analog input value real type Value of measured voltage in volts AOn analog input value real type The percentage relation between the measured and the nominal value of the analog input For the value FS 0 applies the value of PCT 0 and for the value FS 30000 the value PCT 100 The behaviour of individual data objects is described in the following chapter 3 4 1 4 Initialization and behaviour of individual data objects of the IT 1601 module The IT 1601 peripheral module contains a block of analog inputs and outputs The panel for parameters setting can be opened from the project manager in the node HW Configuration HW fig 3 4 5
278. ut detection in the status word range descent only range of 4 20 mA Table 2 37 Basic parameters of input ranges for passive resistor sensors Reference voltage 10V Analog input error max error at 25 0 5 96 of full range temperature coefficient 0 05 of full range K non linearity 0 09 of full range repeatability at steady state conditions 0 07 96 of full range allowed permanent overload without 35 V each terminal Al against damage AGND Total time of system input shift type 80 us Repetition period of the sample type 480 us Overload signalization in the status word Open input detection none Sensor disconnection detection in the status word range exceeding 67 TXV 004 10 02 2 PLC FOXTROT CP 101x module display Ol 1073 e The jumper of the correspondent input must not be set for current measuring In the measuring mode the input can endure the permanent overload of only 5 V without a damage 2 4 4 Analog outputs Analog outputs are used for the control of analog action and signaling elements of the controlled object Basic modules CP 1005 CP 1015 contain 2 analog outputs AOO and AO1 Inputs are voltage inputs 0 10V both have one joint terminal In terms of allowed overload of 105 it is possible to set the voltage of up to 10 5 V on outputs Analog outputs are galvanically isolated from internal circuits Joint terminals of analog inputs analog outputs and reference voltage are interconnected
279. value FC 0 counter free run 1 clearing the counter after variable SET value is gained NI 1 counter clearing from input CLR MD 1 approval of input CAP FMD 0 counter clearing from CAP input 1 capturing of the current value of the counter into the VALB variable from CAP input IRC with clearing and capturing The counter object enables the connection of an incremental position sensor with outputs with open collectors VALA variable Both tracks V DIO and G DI1 clearing impulse NI DI2 and measuring contact MD DI3 may be connected The preset SET variable is also available This mode can be set in the first counter object only The second object must be switched off If the resultant content of the counter is the same as the SET variable value then in the status word in the PS bit the log 1 during one PLC cycle will show as an achieved preset tag If the FC bit is set to log 1 in the control word the counter content will be cleared automatically If the entering edge appears on the NI input up to the level which has been selected during the configuration as active the counter content will be cleared by a single application providing that in the control word the NI bit is set to log 1 The MD input can be used both for the counter clearing or for value capturing The FMD bit in the control word acts as a switch of these functions If the entering edge appears on the MD input up to the level which has been selected dur
280. ve galvanic isolation from internal PLC circuits Outputs excitation is signalized by lighting up of a relevant LED diode 112 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers Table 3 3 4 Basic parameters of relay outputs of the IR 1501 module Module type Number of inputs number of outputs in group 8 8 Galvanic isolation from internal circuits yes Diagnostics Signalization of excited output on panel Type of outputs electromechanical relay unprotected output Contact type switching Switching voltage max 250 V min 5 V Switching current max 3A min 100 mA Short term overload of output max 4A Current through joint terminal max 10A Time of contact closure type 10 ms Time of contact opening type 4 ms Threshold limits of switched loads for resistive load DC13 for inductive load AC15 for inductive load Switching frequency without load Switching frequency with rated load Mechanical lifetime Electrical lifetime at max load for resistive load max 3 A at 30 V DC or 230 V AC max 3 A at 30 V DC max 3 A at 230 V AC max 300 switches min max 20 switches min min 5 000 000 cycles min 100 000 cycles DC13 for inductive load min 100 000 cycles AC15 for inductive load min 100 000 cycles Short circuit protection external Treatment of inductive load External RC unit varistor diode DC Insulation voltage between inputs and internal circuits 3750 V AC between output groups respectivel 3750 V AC Binary in
281. which is not available within this module Check the correctness of communication channel configuration invalid combination of activated variables The peripheral module reports an illegal combination of required data For example some data cannot be transmitted at the same time or the volume of data transmitted is limited or on the other hand it might be necessary to transmit a whole file of required data It is necessary to verify the correctness of configuration setup of the particular peripheral module undertake a new compilation and load the repaired user program into the PLC again 201 TXV 004 10 02 Ar pp 3808 Ar pp 3809 Ar pp 3813 Ar pp 3814 Ar pp 4301 Ar pp 4302 Ar pp 4303 6 Diagnostics and troubleshooting invalid length of activated variable The peripheral module reports an invalid length of a variable The vast majority of variables has a fixed size given by the type of variable If the variable represents a field with a variable length then either too short or too long length of variable was entered in the configuration It is necessary to verify the correctness of configuration setup of the particular peripheral module undertake a new compilation and load the repaired user program into the PLC again unsupported type of analog channel The required type of the analog channel is not supported by the peripheral module It is necessary to verify the correctness of configuration setup of the particular
282. without the necessity of taking it out of the rack in the MOSAIC development environment by double click on the field exactly in the front of the name of the module in the Project manager in the folder Hw HW configuration The green sign indicates that the module will be operated the red cross informs that the module will not be operated Execution of the user program with disconnected peripheral modules If there is no software configuration entered in the user program the program will be executed above the PLC working memory only and the PLC inputs and outputs will not be operated The output modules will be blocked in this case 185 TXV 004 10 02 5 PLC operation We can achieve the same result if we select the option Suppress IO modules operation in the Hw HW configuration folder in the Project manager The translator will then ignore the set configuration and the program will be after the compilation and launching executed above the notepad memory only Monitoring of data provided by the peripheral module By pressing the button Setting V V a panel with data structure provided by the specified module appears with its generated symbolic name that can be changed arbitrarily and with current data values Description of the content of this panel is always given in the description of the concrete module 5 5 3 Project archivation in the PLC The FOXTROT PLC enables to archive user projects directly into the central unit This fea
283. y replacement The floating battery if fitted is accessible after the removal of the case on the middle board The back up function and the battery replacement procedure is described in the chapter 2 1 2 After the replacement is done it is necessary to forward the unwanted battery to the authorized organization to be disposed of There can be the battery of the CR2032 type placed in the holder fitted in basic modules with the minimum lifetime of 5 years 7 1 FIRMWARE CHANGE The TECOMAT FOXTROT system enables the firmware change of all processors without the necessity of removal Changes are undertaken via the central unit The upgrading programs needed and individual firmwares are accessible on the Internet www tecomat com 214 TXV 004 10 02 TECOMAT FOXTROT programmable controllers 7 1 1 Central unit firmware change For the firmware change company system software in central units of the TECOMAT FOXTROT system the program Firmupic exe is used similar program is used also for systems TC650 and TC700 The change can be undertaken via the serial line or the Ethernet The Firmup1c exe program is a consol application that can be run under Windows 2000 and Windows XP operation systems This program requires for the functioning the SimplePlcCom dll library which must be located in the same folder as the program Firmup1c exe is The central unit firmware consists of several files whereas some can be changed by the Teco maintenance worke
284. ystem stack range exceeded The reason of this error can be the recursive calling of the same function in the ST language or incorrect operation with the system stack via instructions PSHB PSHW PSHL PSHQ and POPB POPW POPL POPQ unsupported functional block The programmed functional block is not supported by the central unit maximum cycle time exceeded The cycle time is longer than the set value maximum time of the interrupted process exceeded The interrupt process execution time exceeded 5 ms or the cycle time was exceeded during the interrupt process execution see error 95 00 pcpcpo 6 3 2 Communication channel operation errors The errors are reported by the central unit The numerical codes are in hexadecimal form The character cc stands for serial channel numbers 01 and 02 CH1 and CH2 E1 Ethernet 83 cc 3701 serial channel initialization table length is invalid The initialization table is either broken or designated for another type of module or another version of module Usually the reason of this error is that the serial channels does not allow setting of the required mode and sets itself to the off mode thus it switches off Special submodules requiring special operation are identified by the central unit automatically and only such modes can then be set on 196 TXV 004 10 02 83 cc 3702 83 cc 3801 83 cc 3802 83 cc 3803 83 cc 3804 83 cc 3810 83 cc 3811 TECOMAT FOXTROT pro
285. zation and check of the PLC peripheral system Starting the user program without restart The user program is also possible to be run without restart In this case only the user program integrity test and PLC peripheral system check is performed User processes during restart Depending on the type of restart runs also the scheduler of user processes P If warm restart is executed within HALT RUN switching user process P62 is executed as the first one after switching to the RUN mode if it is programmed In case of cold restart user process P63 is executed as the first one If no restart is executed during the switching to the RUN mode process PO is executed as the first one after the switching 5 4 5 Change of the program while the PLC is in operation The Mosaic development environment enables a so called online program change which is a change of the user program undertaken while the PLC is in operation This can be tried out on the PLC simulator in the Mosaic development environment The on line change of the program is a feature of the central unit which allows performing changes to the user program without stopping the technology under the control i e without a necessity to shut down the technology controlled when modifying the PLC program This feature gives the programmer using the FOXTROT system a possibility to make changes to the PLC program while the PLC is running It is of course the programmer who is responsible for

TECOMAT FOXTROT PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents